598885
215
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/219
Next page
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
This manual is common to all the models regardless of sufxes of the Model No.
z
for India
PT-RZ12KD / PT-RS11KD
z
for other countries or regions
PT-RZ12K
/
PT- RS11K
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual
for future use.
Before using this product, be sure to read “Read this rst!” (
x
pages 5 to 14).
TQBJ0904
DLP™ Projector
Commercial Use
Operating Instructions
Functional Manual
ENGLISH
Model No.
PT-RZ12K
PT-RS11K
The projection lens is sold separately.
2 - ENGLISH
Contents
Contents
Read this rst! 5
Chapter 1 Preparation
Precautions for use 18
Cautions when transporting
18
Cautions when installing
18
Security
21
DIGITAL LINK
21
Art-Net
22
Early Warning Software
22
Disposal
22
Cautions on use
22
Accessories
24
Optional accessories
25
About your projector
26
Remote control
26
Projector body
28
Preparing the remote control
31
Inserting and removing the batteries
31
When using the multiple projectors
31
Connecting the remote control to the projector
with a cable
32
Chapter 2 Getting Started
Setting up 34
Installation mode
34
Parts for ceiling mount (optional)
35
Projected image and throw distance
35
Adjusting adjustable feet
45
Attaching/removing the projection lens
(optional)
46
Attaching the projection lens
46
Removing the projection lens
47
Connecting
48
Before connecting
48
Connecting example: AV equipment
49
Connecting example: Computers
50
Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK
51
Chapter 3 Basic Operations
Switching on/off the projector 54
Connecting the power cord
54
Power indicator
54
Switching on the projector
55
When the initial setting screen is displayed
56
Making adjustments and selections
62
Switching off the projector
63
Projecting 64
Selecting the input signal
64
How to adjust focus, zoom, and shift
64
Adjusting the lens position and focus when the
Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90)
is used
65
Setting the lens position
66
Adjustment range by the lens position shift
(optical shift)
66
Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus is
unbalanced
67
Operating with the remote control
70
Switching the input
70
Using the shutter function
71
Using the on-screen display function
72
Using the automatic setup function
72
Switching the image aspect ratio
72
Using the function button
73
Displaying internal test pattern
73
Using the status function
73
Using the AC voltage monitor function
74
Setting ID number of the remote control
74
Chapter 4 Settings
Menu navigation 76
Navigating through the menu
76
Main menu
77
Sub-menu
78
[PICTURE] menu
82
[PICTURE MODE]
82
[CONTRAST]
82
[BRIGHTNESS]
83
[COLOR]
83
[TINT]
83
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
83
[GAMMA]
85
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
86
[SHARPNESS]
86
[NOISE REDUCTION]
87
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
87
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
88
sRGB-compliant video
89
[POSITION] menu
90
[SHIFT]
90
[ASPECT]
90
[ZOOM]
91
[CLOCK PHASE]
92
[GEOMETRY]
92
ENGLISH - 3
Contents
[ADVANCED MENU] menu
95
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
95
[BLANKING]
95
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
96
[CLAMP POSITION]
96
[EDGE BLENDING]
97
[FRAME RESPONSE]
98
[FRAME CREATION]
99
[FRAME LOCK]
99
[RASTER POSITION]
100
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
101
Changing the display language
101
[3D SETTINGS] menu
102
[3D SYSTEM SETTING]
102
[3D SYNC SETTING]
102
[3D INPUT FORMAT]
103
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
103
[3D COLOR MATCHING]
103
[3D PICTURE BALANCE]
104
[DARK TIME SETTING]
104
[3D FRAME DELAY]
105
[3D TEST MODE]
105
[3D TEST PATTERN]
105
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE]
106
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]
106
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
107
[COLOR MATCHING]
107
[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION]
108
[SCREEN SETTING]
108
[AUTO SIGNAL]
109
[AUTO SETUP]
109
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
110
[SIMUL INPUT SETTING]
111
[RGB IN]
112
[DVI-D IN]
113
[HDMI IN]
114
[DIGITAL LINK IN]
115
[SDI IN]
117
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
118
[IMAGE ROTATION]
120
[BACK COLOR]
120
[STARTUP LOGO]
120
[UNIFORMITY]
121
[SHUTTER SETTING]
121
[FREEZE]
123
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
123
[CUT OFF]
124
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
125
[PROJECTOR ID]
125
[PROJECTION METHOD]
125
[OPERATION SETTING]
125
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
129
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]
130
[STANDBY MODE]
134
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
134
[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]
134
[INITIAL STARTUP]
135
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
135
[DATE AND TIME]
135
[SCHEDULE]
136
[RS-232C]
138
[REMOTE2 MODE]
140
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
140
[LENS CALIBRATION]
140
[LENS MEMORY]
141
[STATUS]
142
[AC VOLTAGE MONITOR]
143
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
144
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
144
[INITIALIZE]
144
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
145
[P IN P] menu
146
Using P IN P function
146
[TEST PATTERN] menu
148
[TEST PATTERN]
148
[SIGNAL LIST] menu
149
Registering new signals
149
Renaming the registered signal
149
Deleting the registered signal
149
Protecting the registered signal
150
Expanding signal lock-in range
150
Sub memory
151
[SECURITY] menu
152
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
152
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
152
[DISPLAY SETTING]
152
[TEXT CHANGE]
153
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
153
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
154
4 - ENGLISH
Contents
[NETWORK] menu 156
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]
156
[DIGITAL LINK SETUP]
156
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]
157
[NETWORK SETUP]
157
[NETWORK CONTROL]
158
[NETWORK STATUS]
158
[DIGITAL LINK MENU]
159
[Art-Net SETUP]
159
[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]
159
[Art-Net STATUS]
160
Network connection
160
Connecting to a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
161
Accessing from the web browser
162
Chapter 5 Maintenance
Light source/temperature/lter indicators 182
When an indicator lights up
182
Maintenance/replacement
184
Before performing maintenance/replacement
184
Maintenance
184
Replacing the unit
186
Troubleshooting
187
Self-diagnosis display
189
Chapter 6 Appendix
Technical information 192
PJLink protocol
192
Using Art-Net function
193
Control commands via LAN
196
<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal
199
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
203
Two-window display combination list
204
Control device password
205
Upgrade Kit
205
List of compatible signals
206
Specications
212
Dimensions
215
Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount
Bracket
216
Index
217
ENGLISH - 5
Read this rst!
Read this rst!
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
WARNING: To prevent damage which may result in re or shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain
or moisture.
This device is not intended for use in the direct eld of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid
incommoding reexions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct
eld of view.
The equipment is not intended for used at a video workstation in compliance BildscharbV.
The sound pressure level at the operator position is equal or less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 7779.
WARNING:
1. Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time.
2. To prevent electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualied
service personnel.
3. Do not remove the earthing pin on the mains plug. This apparatus is equipped with a three prong earthing-
type mains plug. This plug will only t an earthing-type mains socket. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the mains socket, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the
earthing plug.
WARNING:
This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR32.
In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
CAUTION: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using
the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral
devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modications to this equipment could void the users
authority to operate this device.
This is a device to project images onto a screen, etc., and is not intended for use as indoor lighting in a
domestic environment.
Directive 2009/125/EC
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN
Indicated on the projector
The lightning ash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufcient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
product.
6 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
Notice on laser
(for USA and Canada)
This projector is the Class 3R laser product that complies with IEC 60825-1:2007.
For North America
“Complies with 21 CFR Parts 1040.10 and 140.11
except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice
No.50 dated june 24.2007”
IEC 60825-1:2007
LASER RADIATION
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
WAVE LENGTH:448-462nm
MAXIMUM OUTPUT:333mW
IEC 60825-1:2007
RAYONNEMENT LASER
EXPOSITION DIRECTE DANGEREUSE POUR LES YEUX
APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 3R
LONGUEURS D'ONDES:448-462nm
MAXIMALE DU RAYONNEMENT:248mW
DUR E DE L'IMPULSION:1.1ms
DANGER-
CLASS 4 LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EYE OR
SKIN EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED RADIATION
DANGER-
RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 4 - EN CAS D'OUVERTURE
EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU RAYONNEMENT DIRECT OU
DIFFUS DES YEUX OU DE LA PEAU
(Inside of product)
(for India)
This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
(for other countries or regions)
This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
ENGLISH - 7
Read this rst!
CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)
Power Supply: This Projector is designed to operate on 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz AC, house current only.
CAUTION: The AC power cord which is supplied with the projector as an accessory can only be used for
power supplies up to 125 V. If you need to use higher voltages than this, you will need to obtain a
separate 250 V power cord. If you use the accessory cord in such situations, re may result.
CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)
This equipment is equipped with a three-pin grounding-type power plug. Do not
remove the grounding pin on the power plug. This plug will only t a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the
outlet, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug.
Do not remove
WARNING (USA and Canada)
f
Not for use in a computer room as dened in the Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data
Processing Equipment, ANSI/NFPA 75.
f
For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the
building installation wiring.
f
For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling
may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
8 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
FCC NOTICE (USA)
Verication
Model Number: PT-RZ12K / PT-RS11K
Trade Name: Panasonic
Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America
Address: Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
General Contact: http://www.panasonic.com/support
Projector Contact: http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Caution:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using the provided
power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices. Also, any
unauthorized changes or modications to this equipment could void the users authority to operate this device.
ENGLISH - 9
Read this rst!
IMPORTANT: THE MOLDED PLUG (U.K. only)
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a molded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp fuse
is tted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating
of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is retted when the fuse is replaced. If you
lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover
can be purchased from an Authorized Service Center.
If the tted molded plug is unsuitable for the mains socket in your home, then the fuse should be
removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the
cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be tted, please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt, please consult a qualied electrician.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code:
Green - and - Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colors of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the colored markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is colored GREEN - AND - YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug
which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol
or colored GREEN or GREEN - AND -
YELLOW.
The wire which is colored BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or colored BLACK.
The wire which is colored BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter L or colored RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
Importers name and address within the European Union
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
10 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
WARNING:
r
POWER
The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply immediately.
Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in re or electric shock.
f
If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.
f
If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.
f
If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.
Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.
During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable.
Electric shocks can result.
Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug.
If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or re will result.
f
Do not damage the power cord, make any modications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it
excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.
Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.
Do not use anything other than the provided power cord.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks or re. Please note that if you do not use the provided power
cord to ground the device on the side of the outlet, this may result in electric shocks.
Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal.
If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.
f
Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.
Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.
Do not overload the wall outlet.
If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and re will result.
Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust.
Failure to observe this will cause a re.
f
If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.
f
If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power plug out from the wall outlet.
Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.
r
ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, re or damage to the projector.
Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into
contact with oily smoke or steam.
Using the projector under such conditions will result in re, electric shocks or deterioration of components.
Deterioration of components (such as ceiling mount brackets) may cause the projector which is mounted on the
ceiling to fall down.
Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector
or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.
Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage
could result.
Do not cover the air intake/exhaust ports or place anything within 500 mm (19-11/16") of them.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause re or damage to the projector.
f
Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.
f
Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the air intake port.
ENGLISH - 11
Read this rst!
WARNING:
Do not look at or place your skin into the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause burns or loss of sight.
f
Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not look at or place your hands directly into this light.
f
Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and switch
off the main power when you are away from the projector.
Do not project an image with the lens cover of the projection lens (optional) attached.
Doing so can cause re.
Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector.
High voltages can cause re or electric shocks.
f
For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.
Doing so may cause exposure to dangerous laser radiation.
f
The laser module is built in this projector. Follow procedures specied in the Operating Instructions to make
operations and adjustments.
Do not allow metal objects, ammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow
the projector to get wet.
Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in re, electric shock, or malfunction of the
projector.
f
Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.
f
If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.
f
Particular attention must be paid to children.
Use the ceiling mount bracket specied by Panasonic.
Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specied one will result in falling accidents.
f
Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.
Installation work (such as ceiling mount bracket) should only be carried out by a qualied technician.
If installation is not carried out and secured correctly, it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.
f
Be sure to use the wire provided with the ceiling mount bracket as an extra safety measure to prevent the
projector from falling down. (Install in a different location to the ceiling mount bracket.)
r
ACCESSORIES
Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following.
Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch re.
f
Do not use unspecied batteries.
f
Do not charge dry cell batteries.
f
Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.
f
Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or re.
f
Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as
necklaces or hairpins.
f
Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.
f
Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.
f
Make sure the polarities (+ and –) are correct when inserting the batteries.
f
Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.
f
Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.
If the battery uid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.
f
Battery uid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inammation or injury.
Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
f
Battery uid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight.
In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
Do not allow children to reach the lens xing screw.
Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm.
f
If swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.
f
Leaving them in the unit may result in uid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.
12 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
CAUTION:
r
POWER
When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.
If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and re, short-circuits or serious electric shocks
will result.
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall
outlet.
Failure to do so may result in re or electric shock.
Before replacing the projection lens, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from
the wall outlet.
f
Unexpected projection of light may cause injury to eyes.
f
Replacing the projection lens without removing the power plug may result in electric shock.
Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before carrying out any cleaning and replacing the unit.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
r
ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or
injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.
Do not put your weight on this projector.
You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.
f
Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.
Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations.
Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in re.
f
Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near heaters.
Do not install the projector in a location where salt pollution or corrosive gas may occur.
Doing so may result in falling due to corrosion. Also, it may result in malfunctions.
Do not place your hands or other objects close to the air exhaust port.
Doing so will cause burns or damage your hands or other objects.
f
Heated air comes out of the air exhaust port. Do not place your hands or face, or objects which cannot
withstand heat close to this port.
Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.
Failure to observe this could cause injury.
Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.
f
Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause re, damage to an object, or malfunction of the projector.
f
Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
The projector must be carried or installed by two or more people.
Failure to do so may cause falling accidents.
Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.
Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause re or electric shocks to
occur.
When mounting the projector on the ceiling, keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with
metal parts inside the ceiling.
Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.
ENGLISH - 13
Read this rst!
CAUTION:
r
ACCESSORIES
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote
control.
Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch re or explode, which may result in re
or contamination of surrounding area.
r
MAINTENANCE
Do not attach the air lter unit while it is wet.
Doing so may result in electric shock or malfunctions.
f
After you clean the air lter units, dry them thoroughly before reattaching them.
Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector every 20 000 hours of usage as an estimated
duration.
Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in re.
f
For cleaning fee, ask your dealer.
r
VIEWING 3D VIDEO
Those with a medical history of oversensitivity to light, heart problems, or poor physical health should
not view 3D images.
This may lead to a worsening of medical conditions.
If you feel tiredness or discomfort, or other abnormality while viewing with 3D Eyewear, discontinue
viewing.
Continuing use may cause health problems. Take a break as necessary.
When viewing 3D movies, aim to view one movie at a time and take a break as necessary.
When viewing 3D images, for example when playing 3D games or using a PC where two way interaction
is possible, take an appropriate break every 30 to 60 minutes.
Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.
When preparing contents, use contents properly created to be used for 3D.
This may cause eye fatigue or health problems.
When viewing 3D images, pay attention to people and objects in the vicinity.
3D video may be mistaken for actual objects, and the related bodily movements can cause damage to objects
and lead to injury.
Use 3D Eyewear when viewing 3D videos.
Do not tilt your head when viewing with 3D Eyewear.
Those who are near or far sighted, those with weaker eyesight in one eye, or those with astigmatism
should use corrective glasses etc. when using 3D Eyewear.
If the image appears distinctly double when viewing 3D video, discontinue viewing.
Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.
View at a distance of at least three times the effective height of the screen.
Viewing at distance closer than the recommended distance may cause eye fatigue. As with movies, if there are
black bands at the top and bottom of the video, view at a distance of 3 times or more of the height of the video
section.
Children younger than 5 or 6 years old should not use 3D Eyewear.
As it is difcult to gauge the reactions of children to fatigue and discomfort their condition may worsen suddenly.
If a child uses the 3D Eyewear, guardians should beware of the child’s eyes becoming tired.
14 - ENGLISH
Read this rst!
To remove the battery
Remote Control Battery
1. Press the guide and lift the cover.
(i)
(ii)
2. Remove the batteries.
Brazil Only
Brasil Apenas
r
Manuseio de baterias usadas
BRASIL
Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias deverão
ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial
ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada.
Cobrir os terminais positivo (+) e negativo (-) com uma ta isolante adesiva, antes de depositar numa caixa
destinada para o recolhimento. O contato entre partes metálicas pode causar vazamentos, gerar calor, romper
a blindagem e produzir fogo. (Fig. 1)
Fig. 1
Como isolar os terminais
Não desmonte, não remova o invólucro, nem amasse a bateria. O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a
garganta, danicar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo
devido ao curto circuito dos terminais. Não incinere nem aqueça as baterias, elas não podem car expostas a
temperaturas superiores a 100 °C (212 °F). O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danicar o lacre
do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos
terminais provocado internamente.
Evite o contato com o liquido que vazar das baterias. Caso isto ocorra, lave bem a parte afetada com bastante
água. Caso haja irritação, consulte um médico.
r
Remoção das baterias
1. Pressione a guia e levante a tampa.
(i)
(ii)
2. Remova as baterias.
Fita Isolante
Fita Isolante
ENGLISH - 15
rTrademarks
f SOLID SHINE is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
f Windows and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
f Mac, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
f PJLink
TM
is a registered trademark or pending trademark in Japan, the United States, and other countries and
regions.
f HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
f RoomView and Crestron RoomView are registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
Crestron Connected
TM
and Fusion RV are trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
f HDBaseT
TM
is a trademark of HDBaseT Alliance.
f Art-Net
TM
Designed by and Copyright Artistic Licence Holdings Ltd
f DisplayPort is a trademark or registered trademark of the Video Electronics Standards Association.
f Adobe, Adobe Flash Player, and Adobe Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.
in the United States and/or other countries.
f RealD 3D is a trademark of RealD Inc.
f Some of the fonts used in the on-screen menu are Ricoh bitmap fonts, which are manufactured and sold by
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
f All other names, company names, and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
Please note that the
®
and
TM
symbols are not specied in this manual.
rIllustrations in this manual
f Illustrations of the projector, screen, and other parts may vary from the actual product.
f Illustrations of the projector with the power cord attached are only examples. The shape of the supplied power
cords varies depending on the country where you purchased the product.
rReference pages
f Reference pages in this manual are indicated as (x page 00).
rTerm
f In this manual, the “Wireless/wired remote control unit” accessory is referred to as “Remote control”.
16 - ENGLISH
Features of the Projector
High luminance and high contrast
With the high efcient optical system that
maximizes the output of the solid-state
light source, and unique drive system, high
luminance of 12 000 lm and high contrast
of 20 000:1 are realized in addition to the
high color reproduction.
Easy and highly exible setup
In addition to the DIGITAL LINK support,
Art-Net support, and abundant lineup
of the optional lens, application to wide
range of usage is possible with support of
all 360° direction projection utilizing the
characteristics of solid-state light source.
Long life and high reliability
The maintenance cost for long-term
operation is reduced by the unique light
source cooling control technology and
improvement of the dust resistance. Also,
it will contribute to the stable operation by
implementation of the backup function that
will continue the projection by switching to
the backup input signal immediately even
when the input signal is discontinued, in
addition to adopting solid-state light source
which has long life.
Quick Steps
For details, refer to the corresponding pages.
1. Set up the projector.
(x page 34)
2. Attach the projection lens
(optional).
(x page 46)
3. Connect with external devices.
(x page 48)
4. Connect the power cord.
(x page 54)
5. Switch on the projector.
(x page 55)
6. Make initial settings.
(x page 56)
f Take this step when you switch on the
power for the rst time after purchasing the
projector.
7. Select the input signal.
(x page 64)
8. Adjust the image.
(x page 64)
ENGLISH - 17
Chapter 1 Preparation
This chapter describes things you need to know or check before using the projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
18 - ENGLISH
Precautions for use
Cautions when transporting
f Before using the projector, remove the dust sponge from the mounting portion of the projection lens and store it
for the future use. When transporting the projector, remove the projection lens before attaching the dust sponge.
Otherwise dust will accumulate inside and may cause malfunctions.
f Transport the projector with 2 or more people. Failure to do so may drop the projector, which may result in
damage or deformation of the projector, or injury.
f When transporting the projector, hold it securely by its bottom and avoid excessive vibration and impacts. They
may damage the internal components and result in malfunctions.
f Do not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.
Cautions when installing
rDo not set up the projector outdoors.
The projector is designed for indoor use only.
rDo not set up the projector in the following locations.
f Places where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal
components or malfunction.
f Location close to sea or where corrosive gas may occur: The projector may fall due to corrosion. Also, failure to
do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.
f Near the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may uctuate in rare
cases due to the heated air from the air exhaust port or the hot or cooled air. Make sure that the exhaust
from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward the front of the
projector.
f Places with sharp temperature uctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of
the light source, or result in deformation of the projector due to heat, which may cause malfunctions.
Follow the operating environment temperature of the projector.
f Near high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.
f Places where there is high-power laser equipment: Directing a laser beam onto the projection lens surface
causes damage to the DLP chips.
rBe sure to ask a specialized technician or your dealer when installing the projector on
a ceiling.
The optional Ceiling Mount Bracket is required.
Model No.: ET-PKD520H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD520S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PKD520B (Projector Mount
Bracket)
rAsk a qualied technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK
connection.
Image and sound may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate
installation.
rThe projector may not work properly due to strong radio wave from the broadcast
station or the radio.
If there is any facility or equipment which outputs strong radio waves near the installation location, install the
projector at a location sufciently far from the source of the radio waves. Or, wrap the LAN cable connected to the
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal using a piece of metal foil or a metal pipe which is grounded at both ends.
rFocus adjustment
The high clarity projection lens is thermally affected by the light from the light source, making the focus unstable in
the period just after switching on the power. It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least
30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 19
rDo not install the projector at an altitude of 4 200 m (13 780') or higher above sea level.
rDo not use the projector in a location that the ambient temperature exceeds 50 °C
(122 °F).
Using the projector in a location that the altitude is too high or the ambient temperature is too high may reduce the
life of the components or result in malfunctions.
The upper limit of the operating environment temperature differs depending on the altitude or the [OPERATING
MODE] setting in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING] (x page 125).
Altitude above sea level
Setting for [OPERATING MODE]
[NORMAL], [USER1], [USER2], [USER3]
[ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2],
[LONG LIFE3]
Altitude of 0 m (0') or higher
to lower than 1 400 m
(4 593')
0 °C (32 °F) to 50 °C (122 °F)
0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F)
Altitude of 1 400 m (4 593')
or higher to lower than
2 700 m (8 858')
0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F)
Altitude of 2 700 m (8 858')
or higher to lower than
4 200 m (13 780')
The projector cannot be used.
When the Smoke Cut Filter is used, the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and
40 °C (104 °F) regardless of the [OPERATING MODE] setting. It cannot be used at an altitude of 1 400 m (4 593')
or higher above sea level.
rProjection in all 360° direction is possible.
360°
360°
360°
360° vertically 360° horizontally 360° tilted
(combination of vertical and horizontal)
rCautions when setting up the projector
f Use the adjustable feet only for the oor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using them for other
purposes may damage the projector.
f The adjustable feet can be removed if not needed in the installation. However, do not use the screw holes
where the adjustable feet were removed to x the projector in place.
Also, insert only the screws that are specied in the user manual of the optional accessories into the screw
holes of the adjustable feet. Failure to do so may cause damage to the projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
20 - ENGLISH
f When installing the projector in a method other than the oor installation using the adjustable feet, or the ceiling
installation, remove the adjustable feet (4 locations) and use the six screw holes for ceiling mount to x the
projector to a mount (as shown in the gure).
(Screw diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the projector: 27 mm (1-1/16"), torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)
Screw holes for ceiling mount
(M6)
Adjustable feet
Mount
Positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and
adjustable feet
Adjustable feet
f Do not stack three or more projectors.
f Do not stack two projectors and use them simultaneously.
When stacking two projectors, use one of the either projector, and the other project as a backup. Also, take
measure to prevent slipping off as a precaution. Use the optional Frame (Model No.: ET-PFD510) when stacking
two projectors and using them simultaneously.
f Do not use the projector supporting it by the top.
f Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 21
f Prevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system to blow directly to the ventilation ports (intake and
exhaust) of the projector.
100 mm (3-15/16") or longer
500 mm (19-11/16") or longer 500 mm (19-11/16") or longer
500 mm (19-11/16") or longer
f Do not install the projector in a conned space.
When installing the projector in a conned space, provide air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust heat
may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.
Security
When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.
f Personal information being leaked via this product
f Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party
f Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party
Take sufcient security measures. (x pages 152, 177)
f Make your password difcult to guess as much as possible.
f Change your password periodically.
f Panasonic Corporation or its afliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge your
password in case you receive such inquiries.
f The connecting network must be secured by a rewall, etc.
f Set a password for the web control and restrict the users who can log in.
DIGITAL LINK
“DIGITAL LINK” is a technology to transmit the video, audio, Ethernet, and serial control signals using a twisted
pair cable by adding unique functions by Panasonic to the HDBaseT
TM
communication standard formulated by
HDBaseT Alliance.
This projector supports the optional Panasonic DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G,
ET-YFB200G) and peripheral devices by other manufacturers (twisted-pair-cable transmitters such as the
“XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics) that use the same HDBaseT
TM
standard. For the devices of other
manufacturers that the operation has been veried with this projector, visit the Panasonic website (http://
panasonic.net/avc/projector/). Note that the verication for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the
items set by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been veried. For operation or performance
problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers. This projector
does not support audio transmission because it is not equipped with audio function.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
22 - ENGLISH
Art-Net
“Art-Net” is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP/IP protocol.
By using the DMX controller and the application software, illumination and stage system can be controlled. Art-Net
is made based on DMX512 communication protocol.
Early Warning Software
The projector supports “Early Warning Software”, which monitors the status of the display (projector or at panel
display) and the peripheral devices inside an intranet, and noties of abnormality of such equipment and detects
signs of possible abnormality. Also, maintenance can be performed in advance, because this software gives
notication of approximate time to replace consumables of the display, to clean each part of the display, and to
replace the components of the display.
Depending on the type of license, the number of displays that can be registered for monitoring varies. Limited to
the rst 90 days after installation in a computer, it is possible to register up to 2048 units of displays free of charge.
Download the software from the Panasonic website (http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/pass/). It is necessary to
register and login to PASS
*1
to download.
*1 PASS: Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website
Visit the Panasonic website (http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/pass/) for details.
Disposal
To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal.
Cautions on use
rTo get a good picture quality
In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds
over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from
shining onto the screen.
rDo not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from ngerprints or anything else, this will be magnied and
projected onto the screen.
Attach the supplied lens cover to the optional projection lens when not using the projector.
rDLP chips
f The DLP chips are precision-made. Note that in rare cases, pixels of high precision could be missing or always
lit. Such a phenomenon does not indicate malfunction.
f Directing a high-power laser beam onto the projection lens surface can damage the DLP chips.
rDo not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating.
Doing so may shorten the life of the built-in motor.
rLight source
The light source of the projector uses lasers, and has the following characteristics.
f Depending on the operating environment temperature, the luminance of the light source will decrease.
The higher the temperature becomes, the more the luminance of the light source decreases.
f The luminance of the light source will decrease by duration of usage.
The time until when the luminance of the light source decreases by half differs depending on the setting of the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING] [OPERATING MODE].
The estimated time until when the luminance of the light source decreases by half is as follows.
(The time is estimated when the [PICTURE] menu [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3].)
g When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]: Approximately 20 000 hours
g When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [ECO]: Approximately 24 000 hours
g When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE1]: Approximately 43 000 hours
g When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE2]: Approximately 61 000 hours
g When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [LONG LIFE3]: Approximately 87 000 hours
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 23
The luminance can be maintained as much as possible for the same runtime by setting the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING] [CONSTANT MODE] to [AUTO]. These times are rough estimate
when the projector is used without changing the [OPERATING MODE] and [CONSTANT MODE] settings, and
will vary depending on individual difference and usage condition.
If brightness is noticeably reduced and the light source does not turn on, ask your dealer to clean inside the
projector or replace the light source unit.
rComputer and external device connections
f When connecting a computer or an external device, read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords
and shielded cables as well.
rViewing 3D images
The projector can display the 3D video signal input in various formats such as “frame packing”, “side by side”, etc.
You are required to prepare external devices for viewing 3D images (such as 3D eyewear, video signal output
devices) which are suitable for your 3D system. Connections of the projector and external devices vary depends
on the 3D system to be used, see the operating instructions of external devices you use.
Refer to “List of 3D compatible signals” (x page 209) for the types of 3D video signals that can be used with the
projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
24 - ENGLISH
Accessories
Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the
number of accessories.
Wireless/wired remote control unit <1>
(N2QAYB001052)
Power cord
(K2CM3YY00007)
(K2CT3YY00014)
(K2CG3YY00189)
(K2CZ3YY00058)
(K2CZ3YY00032)
CD-ROM <1>
(TXFQB02WQGZ)
AA/R6 battery <2>
(For remote control unit)
Lens xing screw <1>
(XYN4+J18FJ)
Attention
f After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.
f Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.
f For missing accessories, consult your dealer.
f Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from small children.
Note
f The type and number of the supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the
product.
f The model numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
Chapter 1Preparation — Precautions for use
ENGLISH - 25
Contents of the supplied CD-ROM
The contents of the supplied CD-ROM are as follows.
Instruction/list (PDF) Operating Instructions – Functional Manual
Multi Monitoring & Control Software Operating Instructions
Logo Transfer Software Operating Instructions
List of Compatible Device
Models
This is a list of display models (projector or at panel display) that
are compatible with the software contained in the CD-ROM and
their restrictions.
Software Multi Monitoring & Control
Software (Windows)
This software allows you to monitor and control multiple displays
(projector or at panel display) connected to the LAN.
Logo Transfer Software
(Windows)
This software allows you to transfer original images, such as
company logos to be displayed when projection starts, to the
projector.
Optional accessories
Optional accessories
(product name)
Model No.
Projection lens
Zoom Lens
ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20,
ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40
Fixed-focus Lens ET-D75LE50, ET-D75LE90
Ceiling Mount Bracket
ET-PKD520H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD520S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PKD520B (Projector
Mount Bracket)
Frame ET-PFD510
Replacement Filter Unit ET-EMF330
Smoke Cut Filter ET-SFR330
Early Warning Software
(Basic license/3-year
license)
ET-SWA100 Series
*1
Upgrade Kit ET-UK20
Auto Screen Adjustment
Upgrade Kit
ET-CUK10
*2
Digital Interface Box ET-YFB100G
DIGITAL LINK Switcher ET-YFB200G
*1 The sufx of the Model No. differs according to the license type.
*2 Available worldwide except in the United States.
Note
f The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
26 - ENGLISH
About your projector
Remote control
1
2
6
4
7
5
8
9
10
3
13
12
11
20
14
15
16
23
17
18
19
21
22
Front Top
Bottom
A strap can be attached
depending on the usage.
1 Remote control indicator
Blinks if any button in the remote control is pressed.
2 Power on <b> button
Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN
POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power
is turned off (standby mode).
3 Power standby <v> button
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
4 <MENU> button/<ENTER> button/asqw buttons
Used to navigate through the menu screen. (x page 76)
5 <ON SCREEN> button
Switches the on-screen display function on (display) or off
(hide). (x page 72)
6 <AUTO SETUP> button
Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting
the image.
[PROGRESS] is displayed while in automatic adjustment.
(x page 72)
7 <ASPECT> button
Switches the aspect ratio of the image. (x page 72)
8 Number (<0> - <9>) buttons
Used for entering an ID number or a password in a multiple
projector environment.
9 <STATUS> button
Displays the projector information.
10 <LIGHT> button
Pressing this button lights up the remote control buttons. The
lights will go off when the remote control operation goes idle for
10 seconds.
11 <INPUT MENU> button
Displays the input selection screen. (x page 71)
12 Input selection buttons (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <VIDEO>,
<S-VIDEO Y/C>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>, <HDMI>, <SDI>)
Switches the input signal to project. (x page 70)
The <DISPLAY PORT> button, the <SLOT1> button, and the
<SLOT2> button are not used with the projector.
13 <SHUTTER> button
Used to temporarily turn off the image. (x page 71)
14 <TEST PATTERN> button
Displays the test pattern. (x page 73)
15 Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)
Adjusts the projection lens. (x page 64)
16 <FUNCTION> button
Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button.
(x page 73)
17 <DEFAULT> button
Resets the content of the sub-menu to the factory default.
(x page 77)
18 <ID SET> button
Sets the ID number of the remote control in a multiple projector
environment. (x page 31)
19 <ID ALL> button
Used to simultaneously control all the projectors with a
single remote control in a multiple projector environment.
(x page 31)
20 <LOCK> button
Used to prevent unintended operation by careless pressing of
the buttons and prevent draining the remote control batteries.
Operation of each button on the remote control is disabled by
sliding the <LOCK> button toward the arrow.
21 Remote control signal transmitter
22 Remote control wired terminal
This is a terminal used to connect to the projector via a cable
when the remote control is used as a wired remote control.
(x page 32)
23 Strap hole
Attention
f Do not drop the remote control.
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
ENGLISH - 27
f Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.
f Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.
f Do not swing the remote control holding onto the strap when a strap is attached.
f Observe the following instructions that are indicated on the caution label at the back of the remote control:
g Do not use old battery with new one.
g Do not use batteries other than the type specied.
g Be sure the batteries are inserted properly.
For other instructions, read the instructions related to batteries that are described in “Read this rst!”.
1.Do not use old battery with new one.
2.Do not use batteries other than the
type specified.
3.Be sure the batteries are inserted properly.
Made in China
Caution label at the back of the remote control
Note
f When operating the remote control by directly pointing the remote control signal receiver of the projector, operate the remote control at
a distance approx. 30 m (98'5") or shorter from the remote control signal receiver. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±15°
vertically and ±30° horizontally, but the effective control range may be reduced.
f If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote control may not operate properly.
f The signal will be reected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited from light reection loss due to the screen material.
f If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as uorescent light, the remote control may not operate properly. Use
it in a place distant from the light source.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink if the projector receives a remote control signal.
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
28 - ENGLISH
Projector body
1 2 3
4
5 6
7 7
9
8
88 12
16 17
13 14
10
15
Front
Side
Rear
11
Projection direction
Bottom
1 Remote control signal receiver (front)
2 Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Indicates the status of the power.
3 Light source indicator <LIGHT1>
Indicates the status of light source 1.
4 Light source indicator <LIGHT2>
Indicates the status of light source 2.
5 Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Indicates the internal temperature status.
6 Filter indicator <FILTER>
Indicates the status of the air lter unit.
7 Adjustable feet
Adjusts the projection angle.
8 Air intake port
9 Remote control signal receiver (rear)
10 Air exhaust port
11 Burglar hook port
Attaches a burglar prevention cable, etc.
12 Air lter cover
The air lter unit is inside.
13 Control panel (x page 29)
14 Connecting terminals (x page 30)
15 Security slot
This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security
cables.
16 <AC IN> terminal
Connect the supplied power cord.
17 <MAIN POWER> switch
Turns on/off the main power.
Attention
f Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
ENGLISH - 29
r Control panel
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 Power on <b> button
Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN
POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power
is turned off (standby mode).
2 Power standby <v> button
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
3 <RGB1> button
Switches the input to RGB1.
4 <RGB2> button
Switches the input to RGB2.
5 <DVI-D> button
Switches the input to DVI-D.
6 <HDMI> button
Switches the input to HDMI.
7 <DIGITAL LINK> button
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
8 <SDI 1/2> button
Switches the input to SDI.
9 Input selection terminal indicator
Indicator that shows the selected input terminal. This indicator
lights up when a video signal is being input to the selected
terminal, and blinks when there is no video signal being input.
10 <AUTO SETUP> button
Automatically adjusts the image display position while the
image is projected. [PROGRESS] is displayed while in
automatic adjustment. (x page 72)
11 <MENU> button
Displays or hides the main menu. (x page 76)
Returns to the previous menu when a sub-menu is displayed.
If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least
three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the
on-screen display is turned on.
12 <LENS> button
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and shift (position) of the lens.
13 <ENTER> button
Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.
14 <SHUTTER> button
Used to temporarily turn off the image. (x page 71)
15 asqw buttons
Used to select items in the menu screen, change settings, and
adjust levels.
Also used to enter a password in [SECURITY] or enter
characters.
16 Self-diagnosis display
Automatically displays the value of the input supply voltage, or
details of errors or warnings when they occur.
(x pages 74, 189)
Chapter 1Preparation — About your projector
30 - ENGLISH
r Connecting terminals
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9 10 116
1 <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal
These are terminals to connect the remote control for serial
control in a multiple projector environment.
2 <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the
external control circuit.
3 <SERIAL IN> terminal
This is the RS-232C compatible terminal to externally control
the projector by connecting a computer.
4 <SERIAL OUT> terminal
This is a terminal to output the signal connected to the <SERIAL
IN> terminal.
5 <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal/<3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal
These are terminals to input or output control signals when
using the projector in 3D systems.
6 <SDI IN 1> terminal/<SDI IN 2> terminal
These are terminals to input SDI signals.
7 <RGB 1 IN> terminals (<R/P
R
/VIDEO>, <G/Y>, <B/P
B
/C>,
<SYNC/HD>, <VD>)
These are terminals to input RGB signals, YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signals, Y/C signals, or video signals.
8 <RGB 2 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to input RGB signals or YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signals.
9 <DVI-D IN> terminal
This is the terminal to input DVI-D signals.
10 <HDMI IN> terminal
This is the terminal to input HDMI signals.
11 <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal
This is the LAN terminal to connect to the network. This is also
used when connecting a video signal transmission device via
the LAN terminal.
Attention
f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
Chapter 1Preparation — Preparing the remote control
ENGLISH - 31
Preparing the remote control
Inserting and removing the batteries
(i)
(ii)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Open the cover. (Fig. 1)
2) Insert the batteries and close the cover (insert the m side first). (Fig. 2)
f When removing the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.
When using the multiple projectors
When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector
individually using single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
When using the projectors by setting the ID numbers, set the ID number of the projector body after initial settings
have been completed. Then, set the ID number of the remote control. For initial settings, refer to “When the initial
setting screen is displayed” (x page 56).
The factory default ID number of the projector (projector body and remote control) is set to [ALL], so you can use
it as it is. Set the ID numbers of the projector body and remote control as necessary.
For details on setting the ID number of the remote control, refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control”
(x page 74).
Note
f Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [PROJECTOR ID].
Chapter 1Preparation — Preparing the remote control
32 - ENGLISH
Connecting the remote control to the projector with a cable
If you control the multiple projectors with a single remote control, use commercially available M3 stereo mini jack
cables to connect to the <REMOTE 1 IN>/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminals of the projectors.
The remote control is effective even in places where an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices are
susceptible to outside light.
Connecting terminals
Connecting to a second projector
M3 stereo mini jack cable (commercially
available)
Remote control
Connecting to the remote control wired
terminal
Attention
f Use a cable that is 15 m (49'3") or shorter, with 2 core shielded. The remote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds
15 m (49'3") or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.
ENGLISH - 33
Chapter 2 Getting Started
This chapter describes things you need to do before using the projector such as the setup and connections.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
34 - ENGLISH
Setting up
Installation mode
The installation modes of the projector are as follows. Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [PROJECTION
METHOD] (x page 125) depending on the installation mode.
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward Setting on a desk/oor and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Menu item Setting value Menu item Setting value
[PROJECTION METHOD] [FRONT/CEILING] [PROJECTION METHOD] [REAR/FLOOR]
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Setting on a desk/oor and projecting forward
Menu item Setting value Menu item Setting value
[PROJECTION METHOD] [REAR/CEILING] [PROJECTION METHOD] [FRONT/FLOOR]
Portrait setting and projecting from the rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Portrait setting and projecting forward
Menu item Setting value Menu item Setting value
[PROJECTION METHOD] [REAR/FLOOR] [PROJECTION METHOD] [FRONT/FLOOR]
Note
f In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
To display the on-screen menu in portrait, go to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] (x page 118) and change the
[OSD ROTATION] setting.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 35
Parts for ceiling mount (optional)
The projector can be installed on the ceiling by combining the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:
ET-PKD520H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD520S (for Low Ceilings)) and Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.:
ET-PKD520B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
f Be sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket specied for this projector.
f Refer to the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket when installing and setting up the projector.
Two projectors can be stacked and used simultaneously by using the optional Frame (Model No.: ET-PFD510).
Attention
f To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket must be carried out by your dealer or a qualied
technician.
Projected image and throw distance
Install the projector referring to the projected image size and projection distance. Image size and image position
can be adjusted in accordance with the screen size and screen position. When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.:
ET-D75LE90) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of other
lenses. Refer to “For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90)” (x page 36) for details.
SD
L (LW/LT)
L1
L1
L (LW/LT)
SW SH
SH
SW
Projected image
Screen
Screen
(Unit: m)
L (LW/LT)
*1
Projection distance
L1 Lens protrusion dimension
SH Projected image height
SW Projected image width
SD Projected image size
*1 LW: Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
LT: Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
(Unit: m)
Projection lens Model No. Dimension for L1 (approximate value)
ET-D75LE6 0.212
ET-D75LE8 0.254
ET-D75LE10 0.125
ET-D75LE20 0.121
ET-D75LE30 0.121
ET-D75LE40 0.124
ET-D75LE50 0.203
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
36 - ENGLISH
r For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90)
SH
SW
SD
SHA1
L3
L4
A2
L1
L2
SW
Projected image
Screen
Screen
(Unit: m)
SH Projected image height
SW Projected image width
SD Projected image size
L1 Projection distance (from the screen to the mirror reection surface
*1
)
L2 Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen to the tip of the lens)
L3 Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen to the front surface of the projector)
L4 Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen to the rear surface of the projector)
A1 Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen bottom edge to the projector top)
A2 Distance between the projector and the screen (from the screen bottom edge to the projector bottom)
*1 The mirror reection surface cannot be seen from the outside, because it is located inside the Fixed-focus Lens.
(Unit: m)
Distance between projector
and screen
Formula
L2 = L1
*1
+ 0.029
L3 = L1
*1
-
0.277
L4 = L1
*1
-
1.002
A2 = A1
*1
+ 0.324
*1 For details of calculating values, refer to “Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens” (x page 44).
Attention
f Before setting up, read “Precautions for use” (x page 18).
Especially when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is used, install the projector so that its back plane is parallel to the screen,
making the projected image rectangular.
The vertical keystone distortion in moderate range can be corrected by the [POSITION] menu [GEOMETRY] [KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (x page 93) even after the projector is installed. For the range that can be corrected, refer to “[GEOMETRY]
projection range” (x page 37).
f Do not use the projector and the high-powered laser equipment in the same room. The DLP chips can be damaged if a laser beam hits the
projection lens surface.
f The dimension of L4 is not the distance between the rear of the projector body and the wall, but the distance between the rear of the
projector body and the screen surface. Install the projector with 500 mm (19-11/16") or larger space between the rear of the projector body
and the wall or any object so that the ventilation is not obstructed.
When installing the projector in a conned space, provide air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust heat may accumulate when the
ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 37
[GEOMETRY] projection range
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side) [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above)
Screen
Screen
Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side) Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above)
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Arc center
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Arc center
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
38 - ENGLISH
Standard status
Projection
lens Model
No.
Only [KEYSTONE] used [KEYSTONE] and [CURVED] used together Only [CURVED] used
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Min. value of
R2/L2
Min. value of
R3/L3
Min. value of
R2/L2
Min. value of
R3/L3
ET-D75LE6 ±28 ±15 ±10 ±10 1.6 3.9 0.9 2.3
ET-D75LE8 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.3
ET-D75LE10 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 1.1 2.6 0.6 1.5
ET-D75LE20 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.9 1.7 0.5 1.0
ET-D75LE30 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.6 1.2 0.4 0.7
ET-D75LE40 ±40 ±15 ±20 ±15 0.4 0.7 0.2 0.4
ET-D75LE50 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 2.0 4.9 1.2 2.9
ET-D75LE90
*1
+5 /
-
0 0
*1 Only the vertical keystone correction angle can be corrected in the direction in which the projector body moves away from the screen.
When using the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20)
Projection
lens Model
No.
Only [KEYSTONE] used
*1
[KEYSTONE] and [CURVED] used together Only [CURVED] used
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Min. value of
R2/L2
Min. value of
R3/L3
Min. value of
R2/L2
Min. value of
R3/L3
ET-D75LE6 ±28 ±15 ±10 ±10 1.2 3.0 0.7 1.7
ET-D75LE8 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.2 0.3 0.1 0.2
ET-D75LE10 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.9 2.0 0.5 1.1
ET-D75LE20 ±40 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.7 1.3 0.4 0.7
ET-D75LE30 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.5 0.9 0.3 0.5
ET-D75LE40 ±45 ±40 ±20 ±15 0.3 0.5 0.2 0.3
ET-D75LE50 ±22 ±15 ±8 ±8 1.5 3.7 0.9 2.2
ET-D75LE90
*2
+5 /
-
0 0
*1 When [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] are used simultaneously, correction cannot be made exceeding total of 55°.
*2 Only the vertical keystone correction angle can be corrected in the direction in which the projector body moves away from the screen.
Note
f When [GEOMETRY] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.
f Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed.
f Adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY] items may not match the listed projection range depending on the projection lens. Use this projector
within the projection range, otherwise the correction may not work.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 39
Projection distance of each projection lens
A ±5 % error in listed projection distances may occur.
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specied image size.
For PT-RZ12K
r When the image aspect ratio is 16:10
(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE6 ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE8
Throw ratio
*1
0.9-1.1:1 1.3-1.7:1 1.7-2.4:1 2.4-4.7:1 4.6-7.4:1 7.3-13.8:1
Projected image size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 1.35 1.62 1.90 2.46 2.46 3.58 3.56 6.94 6.87 11.04 10.78 20.56
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 1.55 1.86 2.19 2.83 2.82 4.11 4.08 7.96 7.88 12.65 12.37 23.55
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 1.76 2.10 2.47 3.20 3.19 4.64 4.61 8.98 8.88 14.25 13.97 26.54
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 1.96 2.34 2.76 3.56 3.55 5.17 5.13 9.99 9.88 15.85 15.57 29.53
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 2.36 2.82 3.32 4.30 4.28 6.22 6.18 12.03 11.89 19.05 18.76 35.50
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 2.96 3.55 4.18 5.40 5.37 7.81 7.75 15.08 14.90 23.85 23.54 44.47
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 3.97 4.75 5.60 7.24 7.19 10.45 10.38 20.16 19.92 31.86 31.52 59.41
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 4.98 5.96 7.02 9.07 9.00 13.09 13.00 25.25 24.95 39.86 39.49 74.36
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 5.99 7.17 8.44 10.91 10.82 15.73 15.62 30.34 29.97 47.87 47.47 89.30
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 6.99 8.37 9.86 12.74 12.64 18.37 18.24 35.42 34.99 55.87 55.44 104.24
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 8.00 9.58 11.28 14.58 14.46 21.01 20.86 40.51 40.01 63.87 63.42 119.19
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 10.01 11.99 14.12 18.25 18.09 26.29 26.11 50.68 50.05 79.88 79.37 149.08
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 12.03 14.40 16.96 21.92 21.73 31.58 31.35 60.85 60.09 95.89 95.32 178.96
17.78 (700") 9.423 15.077 14.04 16.82 19.80 25.60 25.36 36.86 36.60 71.02 70.13 111.90 111.27
20.32 (800") 10.770 17.231 16.06 19.23 22.64 29.27 29.00 42.14 41.84 81.19 80.17 127.91 127.23
22.86 (900") 12.116 19.385 18.07 21.64 25.48 32.94 32.63 47.42 47.09 91.36 90.21 143.92 143.18
25.40 (1000") 13.462 21.539 20.08 24.06 28.33 36.61 36.27 52.70 52.33 101.53 100.25 159.93 159.13
Lens type Fixed-focus Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE90
*2
ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio
*1
0.36:1 0.7:1
Projected image size
Projection
distance
(L1)
Distance between projector and
screen
Projection
distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW) (L4) (A1) Fixed
1.78 (70") 0.942 1.508 1.01
2.03 (80") 1.077 1.723 1.16
2.29 (90") 1.212 1.939 1.32
2.54 (100") 1.346 2.154 1.47
3.05 (120") 1.615 2.585 0.94
-
0.06 0.24 - 0.33 1.78
3.81 (150") 2.019 3.231 1.18 0.17 0.33 - 0.44 2.24
5.08 (200") 2.692 4.308 1.56 0.56 0.49 - 0.63 3.01
6.35 (250") 3.365 5.385 1.95 0.94 0.64 - 0.82 3.78
7.62 (300") 4.039 6.462 2.33 1.33 0.80 - 1.01 4.56
8.89 (350") 4.712 7.539 2.72 1.71 0.95 - 1.21 5.33
10.16 (400") 5.385 8.616 3.10 2.10 1.11 - 1.40 6.10
12.70 (500") 6.731 10.770 3.87 2.87 1.41 - 1.78 7.64
15.24 (600") 8.077 12.923 4.64 3.64 1.72 - 2.16 9.18
17.78 (700") 9.423 15.077 10.72
20.32 (800") 10.770 17.231 12.27
22.86 (900") 12.116 19.385 13.81
25.40 (1000") 13.462 21.539 15.35
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150").
*2 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of
other lenses. Refer to “For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90)” (x page 36) for details.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
40 - ENGLISH
r When the image aspect ratio is 16:9
(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE6 ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE8
Throw ratio
*1
0.9-1.1:1 1.3-1.7:1 1.7-2.4:1 2.4-4.7:1 4.6-7.4:1 7.3-13.8:1
Projected image size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 1.39 1.66 1.96 2.53 2.53 3.68 3.66 7.14 7.07 11.36 11.09 21.14
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 1.60 1.91 2.25 2.91 2.91 4.23 4.20 8.19 8.10 13.00 12.73 24.21
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 1.81 2.16 2.54 3.29 3.28 4.77 4.74 9.23 9.13 14.65 14.37 27.29
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 2.01 2.41 2.83 3.67 3.65 5.31 5.28 10.28 10.16 16.29 16.01 30.36
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 2.43 2.90 3.42 4.42 4.40 6.40 6.35 12.37 12.23 19.58 19.29 36.50
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 3.05 3.65 4.29 5.55 5.52 8.03 7.97 15.50 15.32 24.52 24.21 45.72
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 4.08 4.89 5.75 7.44 7.39 10.74 10.67 20.73 20.48 32.75 32.40 61.08
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 5.12 6.13 7.21 9.33 9.26 13.46 13.36 25.96 25.64 40.97 40.60 76.44
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 6.15 7.37 8.67 11.21 11.13 16.17 16.06 31.18 30.80 49.20 48.80 91.79
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 7.19 8.61 10.13 13.10 12.99 18.88 18.75 36.41 35.96 57.43 57.00 107.15
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 8.22 9.85 11.59 14.99 14.86 21.60 21.45 41.64 41.12 65.65 65.19 122.51
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 10.29 12.33 14.51 18.76 18.60 27.03 26.84 52.09 51.44 82.11 81.59 153.23
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 12.36 14.81 17.44 22.54 22.33 32.46 32.23 62.54 61.76 98.56 97.98 183.95
17.78 (700") 8.717 15.497 14.43 17.29 20.36 26.31 26.07 37.89 37.62 73.00 72.08 115.02 114.38
20.32 (800") 9.962 17.710 16.50 19.77 23.28 30.09 29.81 43.31 43.01 83.45 82.41 131.47 130.77
22.86 (900") 11.207 19.924 18.57 22.25 26.20 33.86 33.54 48.74 48.40 93.90 92.73 147.92 147.17
25.40 (1000") 12.453 22.138 20.64 24.73 29.12 37.63 37.28 54.17 53.79 104.36 103.05 164.38 163.56
Lens type Fixed-focus Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE90
*2
ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio
*1
0.36:1 0.7:1
Projected image size
Projection
distance
(L1)
Distance between projector and
screen
Projection
distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW) (L4) (A1) Fixed
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 1.04
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 1.20
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 1.36
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 1.51
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 0.97
-
0.03 0.21 - 0.29 1.83
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 1.21 0.20 0.30 - 0.40 2.31
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 1.60 0.60 0.44 - 0.58 3.10
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 2.00 1.00 0.58 - 0.75 3.89
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 2.39 1.39 0.73 - 0.93 4.68
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 2.79 1.79 0.87 - 1.11 5.48
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 3.19 2.18 1.01 - 1.28 6.27
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 3.98 2.97 1.30 - 1.63 7.85
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 4.77 3.77 1.58 - 1.99 9.44
17.78 (700") 8.717 15.497 11.02
20.32 (800") 9.962 17.710 12.61
22.86 (900") 11.207 19.924 14.19
25.40 (1000") 12.453 22.138 15.78
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150").
*2 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of
other lenses. Refer to “For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90)” (x page 36) for details.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 41
r When the image aspect ratio is 4:3
(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE6 ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE8
Throw ratio
*1
1.1-1.3:1 1.6-2.0:1 2.0-2.9:1 2.9-5.6:1 5.5-8.9:1 8.8-16.5:1
Projected image size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 1.54 1.84 2.17 2.80 2.80 4.07 4.04 7.88 7.80 12.52 12.25 23.32
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 1.77 2.11 2.49 3.22 3.21 4.67 4.64 9.03 8.94 14.34 14.06 26.71
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 2.00 2.38 2.81 3.63 3.62 5.27 5.23 10.19 10.07 16.15 15.87 30.09
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 2.22 2.66 3.13 4.05 4.03 5.86 5.82 11.34 11.21 17.96 17.67 33.47
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 2.68 3.20 3.77 4.88 4.86 7.06 7.01 13.64 13.48 21.59 21.28 40.24
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 3.36 4.02 4.74 6.13 6.09 8.85 8.79 17.09 16.89 27.02 26.70 50.39
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 4.50 5.39 6.35 8.21 8.15 11.84 11.76 22.85 22.58 36.09 35.73 67.31
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 5.64 6.76 7.96 10.28 10.20 14.83 14.73 28.61 28.26 45.15 44.76 84.23
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 6.78 8.12 9.56 12.36 12.26 17.82 17.70 34.36 33.94 54.21 53.79 101.14
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 7.92 9.49 11.17 14.44 14.32 20.81 20.67 40.12 39.63 63.27 62.82 118.06
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 9.06 10.85 12.78 16.52 16.38 23.80 23.63 45.88 45.31 72.33 71.85 134.98
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 11.34 13.58 16.00 20.68 20.49 29.78 29.57 57.39 56.68 90.45 89.91 168.81
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 13.62 16.32 19.21 24.83 24.61 35.76 35.51 68.91 68.05 108.58 107.96 202.65
17.78 (700") 10.668 14.224 15.90 19.05 22.43 28.99 28.72 41.74 41.45 80.42 79.41 126.70 126.02
20.32 (800") 12.192 16.256 18.18 21.78 25.65 33.15 32.84 47.72 47.38 91.93 90.78 144.82 144.08
22.86 (900") 13.716 18.288 20.46 24.51 28.86 37.31 36.95 53.70 53.32 103.45 102.15 162.95 162.14
25.40 (1000") 15.240 20.320 22.74 27.24 32.08 41.46 41.07 59.68 59.26 114.96 113.52 181.07 180.20
Lens type Fixed-focus Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE90
*2
ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio
*1
0.44:1 0.8:1
Projected image size
Projection
distance
(L1)
Distance between projector and
screen
Projection
distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW) (L4) (A1) Fixed
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 1.15
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 1.33
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 1.50
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 1.67
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 1.07 0.06 0.29 - 0.39 2.02
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 1.33 0.33 0.40 - 0.52 2.55
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 1.76 0.76 0.57 - 0.73 3.42
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 2.20 1.20 0.74 - 0.95 4.29
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 2.64 1.63 0.92 - 1.17 5.17
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 3.07 2.07 1.09 - 1.38 6.04
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 3.51 2.50 1.27 - 1.60 6.91
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 4.38 3.38 1.62 - 2.03 8.66
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 5.25 4.25 1.97 - 2.46 10.40
17.78 (700") 10.668 14.224 12.15
20.32 (800") 12.192 16.256 13.90
22.86 (900") 13.716 18.288 15.64
25.40 (1000") 15.240 20.320 17.39
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150").
*2 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of
other lenses. Refer to “For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90)” (x page 36) for details.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
42 - ENGLISH
For PT-RS11K
r When the image aspect ratio is 4:3
(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE6 ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE8
Throw ratio
*1
1.0-1.2:1 1.4-1.8:1 1.8-2.6:1 2.6-5.1:1 5.0-8.0:1 7.9-15.0:1
Projected image size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 1.39 1.66 1.95 2.52 2.52 3.66 3.64 7.10 7.02 11.28 11.09 21.14
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 1.60 1.91 2.24 2.89 2.89 4.20 4.17 8.13 8.05 12.92 12.73 24.21
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 1.81 2.16 2.53 3.27 3.26 4.74 4.71 9.17 9.07 14.56 14.37 27.29
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 2.01 2.41 2.82 3.64 3.63 5.28 5.24 10.21 10.10 16.19 16.01 30.36
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 2.43 2.90 3.40 4.39 4.37 6.36 6.31 12.29 12.15 19.46 19.29 36.50
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 3.05 3.65 4.27 5.52 5.49 7.98 7.92 15.41 15.23 24.37 24.21 45.72
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 4.08 4.89 5.72 7.39 7.34 10.67 10.60 20.60 20.35 32.54 32.40 61.08
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 5.12 6.13 7.17 9.27 9.20 13.37 13.28 25.79 25.48 40.72 40.60 76.44
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 6.15 7.37 8.62 11.14 11.06 16.07 15.96 30.99 30.61 48.89 48.80 91.79
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 7.19 8.61 10.07 13.02 12.91 18.77 18.63 36.18 35.74 57.07 57.00 107.15
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 8.22 9.85 11.52 14.90 14.77 21.46 21.31 41.38 40.87 65.25 65.19 122.51
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 10.29 12.33 14.42 18.65 18.48 26.86 26.67 51.77 51.12 81.60 81.59 153.23
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 12.36 14.81 17.33 22.40 22.19 32.25 32.03 62.15 61.38 97.95 97.98 183.95
17.78 (700") 10.668 14.224 14.43 17.29 20.23 26.15 25.91 37.65 37.38 72.54 71.64 114.30 114.38
20.32 (800") 12.192 16.256 16.50 19.77 23.13 29.90 29.62 43.04 42.74 82.93 81.89 130.65 130.77
22.86 (900") 13.716 18.288 18.57 22.25 26.03 33.65 33.33 48.44 48.10 93.32 92.15 147.00 147.17
25.40 (1000") 15.240 20.320 20.64 24.73 28.93 37.40 37.05 53.83 53.45 103.71 102.41 163.36 163.56
Lens type Fixed-focus Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE90
*2
ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio
*1
0.39:1 0.8:1
Projected image size
Projection
distance
(L1)
Distance between projector and
screen
Projection
distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW) (L4) (A1) Fixed
1.78 (70") 1.067 1.422 1.03
2.03 (80") 1.219 1.626 1.19
2.29 (90") 1.372 1.829 1.35
2.54 (100") 1.524 2.032 1.50
3.05 (120") 1.829 2.438 0.96
-
0.04 0.25 1.82
3.81 (150") 2.286 3.048 1.20 0.20 0.34 2.29
5.08 (200") 3.048 4.064 1.59 0.59 0.50 3.08
6.35 (250") 3.810 5.080 1.99 0.98 0.66 3.87
7.62 (300") 4.572 6.096 2.38 1.38 0.81 4.65
8.89 (350") 5.334 7.112 2.77 1.77 0.97 5.44
10.16 (400") 6.096 8.128 3.17 2.16 1.13 6.23
12.70 (500") 7.620 10.160 3.95 2.95 1.44 7.80
15.24 (600") 9.144 12.192 4.74 3.74 1.76 9.38
17.78 (700") 10.668 14.224 10.96
20.32 (800") 12.192 16.256 12.53
22.86 (900") 13.716 18.288 14.11
25.40 (1000") 15.240 20.320 15.68
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150").
*2 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of
other lenses. Refer to “For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90)” (x page 36) for details.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 43
r When the image aspect ratio is 16:9
(Unit: m)
Lens type Zoom Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE6 ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE8
Throw ratio
*1
1.0-1.2:1 1.4-1.8:1 1.8-2.6:1 2.6-5.1:1 5.0-8.0:1 8.0-15.0:1
Projected image size Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 1.52 1.82 2.13 2.75 2.75 4.00 3.97 7.74 7.66 12.31 12.12 23.06
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 1.75 2.09 2.44 3.16 3.15 4.59 4.55 8.88 8.78 14.09 13.90 26.41
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 1.97 2.36 2.76 3.57 3.56 5.17 5.14 10.01 9.90 15.87 15.69 29.76
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 2.20 2.63 3.08 3.98 3.96 5.76 5.72 11.14 11.01 17.65 17.47 33.10
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 2.65 3.17 3.71 4.79 4.77 6.94 6.89 13.40 13.25 21.21 21.04 39.79
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 3.33 3.98 4.66 6.02 5.98 8.70 8.64 16.80 16.60 26.56 26.40 49.83
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 4.45 5.33 6.24 8.06 8.01 11.64 11.56 22.46 22.19 35.46 35.33 66.56
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 5.58 6.68 7.82 10.11 10.03 14.58 14.47 28.11 27.77 44.37 44.26 83.29
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 6.71 8.03 9.40 12.15 12.05 17.51 17.39 33.77 33.36 53.27 53.19 100.02
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 7.84 9.38 10.98 14.19 14.07 20.45 20.31 39.43 38.95 62.18 62.12 116.75
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 8.96 10.73 12.56 16.23 16.10 23.39 23.23 45.09 44.53 71.09 71.05 133.48
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 11.22 13.43 15.72 20.32 20.14 29.27 29.06 56.40 55.70 88.90 88.91 166.95
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 13.47 16.14 18.88 24.41 24.18 35.15 34.90 67.72 66.88 106.71 106.77 200.41
17.78 (700") 8.717 15.497 15.73 18.84 22.04 28.49 28.23 41.02 40.73 79.04 78.05 124.52 124.63
20.32 (800") 9.962 17.710 17.98 21.54 25.20 32.58 32.27 46.90 46.57 90.35 89.22 142.34 142.49
22.86 (900") 11.207 19.924 20.24 24.24 28.36 36.66 36.32 52.78 52.40 101.67 100.39 160.15 160.35
25.40 (1000") 12.453 22.138 22.49 26.94 31.53 40.75 40.36 58.65 58.24 112.98 111.56 177.96 178.20
Lens type Fixed-focus Lens
Projection lens Model No. ET-D75LE90
*2
ET-D75LE50
Throw ratio
*1
0.39:1 0.8:1
Projected image size
Projection
distance
(L1)
Distance between projector and
screen
Projection
distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width (SW) (L4) (A1) Fixed
1.78 (70") 0.872 1.550 1.13
2.03 (80") 0.996 1.771 1.30
2.29 (90") 1.121 1.992 1.47
2.54 (100") 1.245 2.214 1.64
3.05 (120") 1.494 2.657 1.05 0.05 0.18 - 0.53 1.99
3.81 (150") 1.868 3.321 1.31 0.30 0.26 - 0.70 2.50
5.08 (200") 2.491 4.428 1.73 0.73 0.39 - 0.97 3.36
6.35 (250") 3.113 5.535 2.16 1.16 0.51 - 1.24 4.22
7.62 (300") 3.736 6.641 2.59 1.59 0.64 - 1.52 5.08
8.89 (350") 4.358 7.748 3.02 2.02 0.77 - 1.79 5.93
10.16 (400") 4.981 8.855 3.45 2.44 0.90 - 2.07 6.79
12.70 (500") 6.226 11.069 4.30 3.30 1.15 - 2.62 8.51
15.24 (600") 7.472 13.283 5.16 4.16 1.41 - 3.17 10.22
17.78 (700") 8.717 15.497 11.94
20.32 (800") 9.962 17.710 13.66
22.86 (900") 11.207 19.924 15.37
25.40 (1000") 12.453 22.138 17.09
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150").
*2 When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is attached, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of
other lenses. Refer to “For the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90)” (x page 36) for details.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
44 - ENGLISH
Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens
To use a projected image size not listed in this manual, check the projected image size SD (m) and use the
respective formula to calculate projection distance.
The unit of all the formulae is m. (Values obtained by the following calculation formulae contain a slight error.)
When calculating a projection distance using image size designation (value in inches), multiply the value in inches
by 0.0254 and substitute it into SD in the formula for calculating the projection distance.
For PT-RZ12K
r Zoom Lens
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Projection distance (L) formula
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
ET-D75LE6
0.9 - 1.1:1 16:10 = 0.8150 x SD
-
0.0566 = 0.9764 x SD
-
0.0736
0.9 - 1.1:1 16:9 = 0.8858 x SD
-
0.0566 = 1.0630 x SD
-
0.0736
1.1 - 1.3:1 4:3 = 0.7913 x SD
-
0.0566 = 0.9488 x SD
-
0.0736
ET-D75LE10
1.3 - 1.7:1 16:10 = 1.1186 x SD
-
0.0857 = 1.4458 x SD
-
0.1085
1.3 - 1.7:1 16:9 = 1.1497 x SD
-
0.0857 = 1.4860 x SD
-
0.1085
1.6 - 2.0:1 4:3 = 1.2663 x SD
-
0.0857 = 1.6367 x SD
-
0.1085
ET-D75LE20
1.7 - 2.4:1 16:10 = 1.4312 x SD
-
0.0832 = 2.0795 x SD
-
0.1162
1.7 - 2.4:1 16:9 = 1.4709 x SD
-
0.0832 = 2.1373 x SD
-
0.1162
2.0 - 2.9:1 4:3 = 1.6202 x SD
-
0.0832 = 2.3542 x SD
-
0.1162
ET-D75LE30
2.4 - 4.7:1 16:10 = 2.0647 x SD
-
0.1131 = 4.0041 x SD
-
0.1765
2.4 - 4.7:1 16:9 = 2.1221 x SD
-
0.1131 = 4.1155 x SD
-
0.1765
2.9 - 5.6:1 4:3 = 2.3374 x SD
-
0.1131 = 4.5330 x SD
-
0.1765
ET-D75LE40
4.6 - 7.4:1 16:10 = 3.9532 x SD
-
0.1577 = 6.3027 x SD
-
0.1615
4.6 - 7.4:1 16:9 = 4.0631 x SD
-
0.1577 = 6.4779 x SD
-
0.1615
5.5 - 8.9:1 4:3 = 4.4754 x SD
-
0.1577 = 7.1351 x SD
-
0.1615
ET-D75LE8
7.3 - 13.8:1 16:10 = 6.4567 x SD
-
0.3862 = 12.0945 x SD
-
0.3598
7.3 - 13.8:1 16:9 = 7.0315 x SD
-
0.3862 = 13.1732 x SD
-
0.3598
8.8 - 16.5:1 4:3 = 6.2795 x SD
-
0.3862 = 11.7677 x SD
-
0.3598
r Fixed-focus Lens
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Projection distance
(L1) formula
Formula for distance between projector and
screen (A1)
Min. Max.
ET-D75LE90
0.36:1 16:10 = 0.303 x SD + 0.020 = 0.229 x SH
-
0.128 = 0.283 x SH
-
0.128
0.36:1 16:9 = 0.312 x SD + 0.020 = 0.254 x SH
-
0.128 = 0.370 x SH
-
0.128
0.44:1 4:3 = 0.343 x SD + 0.020 = 0.229 x SH
-
0.128 = 0.283 x SH
-
0.128
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
ET-D75LE50
0.7:1 16:10 = 0.6072 x SD
-
0.0713
0.7:1 16:9 = 0.6240 x SD
-
0.0713
0.8:1 4:3 = 0.6873 x SD
-
0.0713
Chapter 2Getting Started — Setting up
ENGLISH - 45
For PT-RS11K
r Zoom Lens
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Projection distance (L) formula
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
ET-D75LE6
1.0 - 1.2:1 4:3 = 0.8150 x SD
-
0.0566 = 0.9764 x SD
-
0.0736
1.0 - 1.2:1 16:9 = 0.8976 x SD
-
0.0566 = 1.0748 x SD
-
0.0736
ET-D75LE10
1.4 - 1.8:1 4:3 =1.1425 x SD
-
0.0857 = 1.4767 x SD
-
0.1085
1.4 - 1.8:1 16:9 = 1.2446 x SD
-
0.0857 = 1.6086 x SD
-
0.1085
ET-D75LE20
1.8 - 2.6:1 4:3 = 1.4618 x SD
-
0.0832 = 2.1241 x SD
-
0.1162
1.8 - 2.6:1 16:9 = 1.5924 x SD
-
0.0832 = 2.3137 x SD
-
0.1162
ET-D75LE30
2.6 - 5.1:1 4:3 = 2.1089 x SD
-
0.1131 = 4.0899 x SD
-
0.1765
2.6 - 5.1:1 16:9 = 2.2972 x SD
-
0.1131 = 4.4552 x SD
-
0.1765
ET-D75LE40
5.0 - 8.0:1 4:3 = 4.0379 x SD
-
0.1577 = 6.4377 x SD
-
0.1615
5.0 - 8.0:1 16:9 = 4.3985 x SD
-
0.1577 = 7.0126 x SD
-
0.1615
ET-D75LE8
7.9 - 15.0:1 4:3 = 6.4567 x SD
-
0.3862 = 12.0945 x SD
-
0.3598
8.0 - 15.0:1 16:9 = 7.1102 x SD
-
0.3862 = 13.3189 x SD
-
0.3598
r Fixed-focus Lens
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Projection distance
(L1) formula
Formula for distance between projector and
screen (A1)
Min. Max.
ET-D75LE90
0.39:1 4:3 = 0.310 x SD + 0.020 = 0.206 x SH
-
0.128
0.39:1 16:9 = 0.337 x SD + 0.020 = 0.275 x SH
-
0.128 = 0.441 x SH
-
0.128
Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
ET-D75LE50
0.8:1 4:3 = 0.6202 x SD
-
0.0713
0.8:1 16:9 = 0.6755 x SD
-
0.0713
Adjusting adjustable feet
Install the projector on a at surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the
projection screen is rectangular.
If the screen is tilted downward, the projection screen can be adjusted to be rectangular by adjusting the front
adjustable feet. The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the
horizontal direction.
Adjustable feet can be extended by turning them as shown in the gure. Turning them in the opposite direction will
return them to the original position.
Adjustable range
Adjustable feet: Approx. 12 mm (15/32") each
Attention
f Be careful not to block the intake/exhaust ports with your hands or any objects when adjusting the adjustable feet while the light source is
on. (x page 28)
Chapter 2Getting Started — Attaching/removing the projection lens (optional)
46 - ENGLISH
Attaching/removing the projection lens (optional)
Move the lens position to the home position before replacing or removing the projection lens. (x page 66)
Attention
f Replace the projection lens after turning off the power of the projector.
f Do not touch the electric contacts of the projection lens. Dust or dirt may cause poor contact.
f Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
f Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens.
Note
f The precautions for handling the lens are different for the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90). For details, refer to the Operating
Instructions of ET-D75LE90.
Attaching the projection lens
Attach the projection lens using the following procedure.
Mark (orange)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Screw hole A
Lens fixing screw
1) Insert the projection lens by aligning the mark on the projection lens (orange) with the mark on the
projector (E to the left of LOCK) and turn clockwise until it clicks. (Fig. 1)
2) Secure the projection lens with the supplied lens fixing screw. (Fig. 2)
f Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure it in screw hole A located to the right of mark on the projection lens
(orange).
f Some lenses may not have a screw hole A for securing the projection lens.
Attention
f Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to conrm that it does not come out.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Attaching/removing the projection lens (optional)
ENGLISH - 47
Removing the projection lens
Remove the projection lens using the following procedure.
Lens release button
Fig. 1
1) Remove the lens fixing screw.
f Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the rst screw to the right of the mark on the projection lens (orange).
2) Remove the projection lens by turning it counterclockwise while pressing the lens release button.
(Fig. 1)
f Turn the projection lens counterclockwise until the mark on the projection lens (orange) is aligned with the
mark on the projector (E to the left of LOCK).
Note
f Some lenses may not have a screw hole to use to secure the projection lens.
Attention
f Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact.
f Store the removed lens xing screw in a safe place.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
48 - ENGLISH
Connecting
Before connecting
f Before connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.
f Turn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.
f Take note of the following points before connecting the cables. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions.
g When connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself, touch any nearby
metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work.
g Do not use unnecessarily long cables to connect a device to the projector or to the projector body. The longer
the cable, the more susceptible to noise it becomes. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an
antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.
g When connecting cables, connect GND rst, then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a
straight manner.
f Acquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied
with the device nor available as an option.
f If video signals from video equipment contain too much jitter, the images on the screen may wobble. In this
case, a time base corrector (TBC) must be connected.
f The projector accepts video signals, Y/C signals, YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signals, analog RGB signals (synchronization
signals are TTL level), and digital signals.
f Some computer models are not compatible with the projector.
f Use a cable compensator when you connect devices to the projector using long cables. Otherwise the image
may not display properly.
f Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 206) for the types of video signals that can be used with the
projector.
<RGB 2 IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
(10)
(6)
(11) (15)
(1) (5)
(1) R/P
R
(9)
(2) G/Y (10) GND
(3) B/P
B
(11) GND
(4) (12) DDC data
(5) GND (13) SYNC/HD
(6) GND (14) VD
(7) GND (15) DDC clock
(8) GND
<HDMI IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
Even-numbered pins of (2) to (18)
(1) (19)
(2) (18)
Odd-numbered pins of (1) to (19)
(1) T.M.D.S data 2+ (11) T.M.D.S clock shield
(2) T.M.D.S data 2 shield (12) T.M.D.S clock
-
(3) T.M.D.S data 2
-
(13) CEC
(4) T.M.D.S data 1+ (14)
(5) T.M.D.S data 1 shield (15) SCL
(6) T.M.D.S data 1
-
(16) SDA
(7) T.M.D.S data 0+ (17)
DDC/CEC
GND
(8) T.M.D.S data 0 shield (18) +5 V
(9) T.M.D.S data 0
-
(19) Hot plug detection
(10) T.M.D.S clock+
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
ENGLISH - 49
<DVI-D IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names
Outside view Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
(17)(24)
(16)
(9)
(1)(8)
(1) T.M.D.S data 2
-
(13)
(2) T.M.D.S data 2+ (14) +5 V
(3) T.M.D.S data 2/4 shield (15) GND
(4) (16) Hot plug detection
(5) (17) T.M.D.S data 0
-
(6) DDC clock (18) T.M.D.S data 0+
(7) DDC data (19) T.M.D.S data 0/5 shield
(8) (20)
(9) T.M.D.S data 1
-
(21)
(10) T.M.D.S data 1+ (22) T.M.D.S clock shield
(11) T.M.D.S data 1/3 shield (23) T.M.D.S clock+
(12) (24) T.M.D.S clock
-
Connecting example: AV equipment
For <HDMI IN>/<DVI-D IN>/<RGB 1 IN> terminals
Blu-ray disc playerVCR (with built-in TBC)
VCR (with built-in TBC)
DVD player with HDMI terminal (HDCP)
Attention
f Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.
g A VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC)
g A time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR
f If nonstandard burst signals are connected, the image may be distorted. In such a case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between the
projector and the external devices.
Note
f When entering DVI-D, it may be necessary to switch the setting using the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [DVI-D IN] [EDID SELECT]
depending on the external device to be connected.
f The <DVI-D IN> terminal can be connected to HDMI- or DVI-D-compliant devices. However, images may not appear or may not be
displayed properly on some devices.
f For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI
standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be displayed.
f The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI-D terminal using an HDMI/DVI
conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and images may not be displayed.
f The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
f When the video signal and the Y/C signal are input, switch the setting using the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [RGB IN] [RGB1 INPUT
SETTING] (x page 112).
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
50 - ENGLISH
For <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals
SD-SDI signal, HD-SDI signal, or 3G-SDI
signal
Digital VCR for commercial use
Note
f Use the [PICTURE] menu [SYSTEM SELECTOR] to switch the input format.
f Some external devices to be connected require the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SDI IN] to be set.
f Use a 5CFB or higher (such as 5CFB, or 7CFB) or a Belden 1694A or higher connection cable to properly transmit images. Use a
connection cable of 100 m (328'1") length or less.
f To input the dual link signals, setting [SDI LINK] in [SDI IN] is required.
f To input the dual link signals, the cables to connect to the <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals should be the same length and the same type.
The image may not be displayed correctly when the difference of the cable length is 4 m (13'1") or more.
f Directly connect the projector with the external device that will output the signal without going through a distributor, etc., when inputting
dual link signals. A phase difference is generated between the LINK-A signal and the LINK-B signal, and the image may not be displayed
correctly.
f When an unsteady signal is connected, an error in signal detection may occur. In such a case, use the [PICTURE] menu [SYSTEM
SELECTOR] to switch to a system that matches the signal format.
Connecting example: Computers
Control computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
Control computer
Attention
f When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially
available shielded cables.
Note
f When entering DVI-D, it may be necessary to switch the setting using the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [DVI-D IN] [EDID SELECT]
depending on the external device to be connected.
f For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI
standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be displayed.
f The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI-D terminal using an HDMI/DVI
conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and images may not be displayed.
f The <DVI-D IN> terminal supports single links only.
f When entering the SYNC ON GREEN signal, do not enter sync signals to the <SYNC/HD> terminal or the <VD> terminal.
f If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate
the projector.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
ENGLISH - 51
Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK
Twisted-pair-cable transmitter based on the communication standard HDBaseT
TM
such as the optional DIGITAL
LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) uses the twisted pair cable to transmit
input images, Ethernet, and serial control signal, and the projector can input such digital signal to the <DIGITAL
LINK/LAN> terminal.
Blu-ray disc player
HDMI cable
(commercially available)
Control computer
*1
Projector connecting terminals
Example of twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Computer
Computer cable
(commercially available)
VCR
Hub
(with built-in TBC)
*1 Control target is the projector or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. The control itself may not be possible depending on the twisted-pair-cable
transmitter. Check the operating instructions of the device to be connected.
Attention
f Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.
g Use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC).
g Use a time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR.
f If nonstandard burst signals are connected, the image may be disrupted. In such a case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between
the projector and the external devices.
f Ask a qualied technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector. Image may
be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.
f For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
g Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
g Shielded type (including connectors)
g Straight-through
g Single wire
f When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, conrm that cable characteristics are compatible with
CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
f Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
f When connecting to the projector using a twisted-pair-cable transmitter (receiver) of other manufacturers, do not place another twisted-pair-
cable transmitter between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers and the projector. This may cause image to be disrupted.
f Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
f To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
f Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
f When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
f After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and conrm that the value of [SIGNAL QUALITY] is
displayed in green which indicates normal quality. (x page 157)
Note
f For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI
standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be displayed.
f The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).
f The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1"). It is possible to transmit
up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method. If this distance is exceeded, image
may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN communication. Please note that Panasonic does not support the use of the projector
outside the maximum transmission distance. When connecting with the long reach, there may be a limitation to the video signal or distance
which can be transmitted, depending on the specication of the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
Chapter 2Getting Started — Connecting
52 - ENGLISH
f For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been veried with the projector, visit the Panasonic
website (http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/). Note that the verication for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set
by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been veried. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of
other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
ENGLISH - 53
Chapter 3 Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic operations to start with.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
54 - ENGLISH
Switching on/off the projector
Connecting the power cord
Make sure that the supplied power cord is securely xed to the projector body to prevent it from being
removed easily.
Conrm that the <MAIN POWER> switch is on the <OFF> side before connecting the power cord.
Use the power cord matching with the power supply voltage and the shape of the outlet.
For details of power cord handling, refer to “Read this rst!” (x page 5).
How to attach the power cord
1) Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal on the side of the projector and the power cord connector,
then insert the connector completely in the correct direction.
How to remove the power cord
Lock button
1) Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch on the side of the projector is on the <OFF> side, and
remove the power plug from the outlet.
2) Remove the power cord connector from the <AC IN> terminal of the projector while pressing the lock
button.
Power indicator
Indicate the status of the power. Check the status of the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> before operating
the projector.
Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Indicator status Projector status
Off The main power is switched off.
Red Lit
The power is switched off. (standby mode)
Projection will start when the power on <b> button is pressed.
f The projector may not operate when the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2>
or the temperature indicator <TEMP> are blinking. (x page 182)
Green Lit Projecting.
Orange Lit
The projector is preparing to switch off the projector.
The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.)
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 55
Note
f While the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in orange, the fan is running to cool the projector.
f For approximately 15 seconds after the projector is switched off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is switched on. Turn on the
power again after the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in red.
f The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lit in red). Refer to “Power consumption”
(x page 212) for the power consumption.
f When the projector receives the signal from the remote control, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink in the following color
according to the status of the projector.
g When the projector is in projection mode: Green
g When the projector is in standby mode: Orange
However, if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the indicator will stay lit in red and will not blink if the
projector is in standby mode.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink slowly in green while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed), or while the
function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] (x page 134) is operating and the light source is turned off.
f If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is blinking in red, consult your dealer.
Switching on the projector
Install the projection lens before switching on the projector.
Remove the lens cover rst.
2)
4)
4)
3)
1)
1) Connect the power cord to the projector.
2) Connect the power plug to an outlet.
3) Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in red, and the projector enters the standby mode.
4) Press the power on <b> button.
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in green and the image is soon projected on the screen.
Attention
f Always remove the lens cover before starting the projection. Projecting continuously while the lens cover is attached may cause the lens
cover to heat up and result in a re.
Note
f A warm-up period of up to approximately ve minutes may be necessary until an image is displayed when the projector is switched on at
around 0 °C (32 °F).
The temperature indicator <TEMP> lights during the warm-up period. When the warm-up is completed, the temperature indicator <TEMP>
turns off and the projection starts. Refer to “When an indicator lights up” (x page 182) for the indicator status display.
f If the operating environment temperature is low and warm-up takes more than ve minutes, the projector will judge that a problem has
occurred and the power will automatically be set to standby mode. In such case, increase the operating environment temperature to 0 °C
(32 °F) or higher, turn off the main power, and then turn on the power again.
f It may take longer to start the projection after the power is turned on when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STANDBY MODE] is set to
[ECO], compared to when it is set to [NORMAL].
f When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [INITIAL STARTUP] is set to [LAST MEMORY], and the power was turned off at the previous
use by pressing the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch while projecting or with the power breaker, the power indicator <ON (G)/
STANDBY (R)> will light up in green and the image is projected after a while when the power is turned on by pressing <ON> side of the
<MAIN POWER> switch while the power plug is plugged into the outlet, or when the power breaker is turned on.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
56 - ENGLISH
When the initial setting screen is displayed
When the projector is switched on for the rst time after purchase, as well as when [ALL USER DATA] is executed
from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [INITIALIZE], the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection
starts, then the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed. Set them according to the circumstances.
In other occasions, you can change the settings by menu operations.
If you press the <MENU> button while the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed, you can go back to the
previous screen.
Focus adjustment
Adjust the focus to display the menu screen clearly.
You may also need to adjust the zoom and shift.
Refer to “How to adjust focus, zoom, and shift” (x page 64) for details.
1) Press asqw to adjust the focus.
52
FOCUS POSITION
LENS
FOCUS
ADJUST
2) Press the <MENU> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (display language)
Select the language to show on the screen.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the display language from the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu.
1) Press as to select the display language.
ENTER
1/7
Please select DISPLAY LANGUAGE.
INITIAL SETTING
SELECT
SET
2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 57
Initial setting (operation setting)
Set the items for the operating method depending on the projector’s application and duration of usage.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu. If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the luminance of light source
decreases by half may shorten or the luminance may decrease.
By using this initial setting (operation setting), you can complete the settings at once when installing the projector,
if the operation method of the projector is determined in advance. If [ALL USER DATA] is executed from the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [INITIALIZE], do not change the initial setting (operation setting) and proceed to
next initial setting (installation setting) by pressing the <ENTER> button. If you need to change the setting, ask the
person responsible for this projector (such as a person in charge of equipment or operation).
2/7
100%
100%
INITIAL SETTING
SET
CHANGEMENU SELECT
OPERATING MODE
CONSTANT MODE
NORMAL
OFF
LINK
GROUP A
ENTER
CALIBRATION TIME
OFF
CALIBRATION MESSAGE
ON
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP
LIGHT OUTPUT
MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL
Set the way to use the projector. For details, please
refer to the operating instructions "When the initial
setting screen is displayed".
Note
f The preceding initial setting screen is displayed when the projector is switched on for the rst time after purchase. If [ALL USER DATA] is
executed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] [INITIALIZE], the settings before execution are displayed in [OPERATING MODE] and [MAX
LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
f For the relationship between the luminance and the runtime, refer to “Interrelation of luminance and runtime” (x page 59).
f For details on each setting item, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING].
1) Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
f Set [OPERATING MODE] to anything other than [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or [LONG LIFE3]
when using the projector at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
[NORMAL]
*1
Set this item when high luminance is required. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours.
[ECO]
*1
Set this item to increase the life of the light source though it will lower the luminance than [NORMAL].
The estimated runtime is approximately 24 000 hours.
[LONG LIFE1]
*1
Set this item to increase the life of the light source though it will lower the luminance than [ECO]. The
estimated runtime is approximately 43 000 hours.
[LONG LIFE2]
*1
Set this item to increase the life of the light source though it will lower the luminance than [LONG
LIFE1]. The estimated runtime is approximately 61 000 hours.
[LONG LIFE3]
*1
Set this item to increase the life of the light source though it will lower the luminance than [LONG
LIFE2]. The estimated runtime is approximately 87 000 hours.
[USER1]
Set [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] individually.[USER2]
[USER3]
*1 The runtime is estimated when the [PICTURE] menu [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3].
f When [NORMAL], [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or [LONG LIFE3] is selected, proceed to Step 5).
3) Press as to select [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
4) Press qw to adjust.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press w.
Increases the maximum level of brightness correction.
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Press q.
Decreases the maximum level of brightness correction.
5) Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
58 - ENGLISH
6) Press qw to adjust.
Operation
Adjustment
Range of adjustment
Brightness Runtime (estimate)
Press w.
The screen becomes brighter. The runtime becomes shorter.
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Press q.
The screen becomes darker. The runtime becomes longer.
7) Press as to select [CONSTANT MODE].
8) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Does not perform the brightness control (correction by the brightness sensor).
[AUTO]
Performs the brightness control (correction by the brightness sensor).
When the brightness of light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the screen is
automatically corrected.
[PC]
Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring
& Control Software”
*1
.
*1 “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.
f When not performing the brightness control ([OFF] is selected), proceed to Step 15).
f When [PC] is selected, proceed to Step 11).
9) Press as to select [LINK].
10) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Performs correction by the brightness sensor on one projector without synchronizing with the other
projectors.
The duration that the constant brightness is kept will become longer by setting the value of [LIGHT
OUTPUT] smaller.
[GROUP A]
[GROUP B]
[GROUP C]
[GROUP D]
Performs correction by the brightness sensor in multiple projectors in synchronization.
Up to four groups (A to D) can be set within the same subnet by using the network function.
You can register and synchronize up to eight projectors in one group.
11) Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].
12) Press the number (<0> - <9>) buttons on the remote control to enter the time.
f The projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
f Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”.
f [CALIBRATION TIME] is set when the cursor is moved from [CALIBRATION TIME] using as.
f Brightness and color are measured at the specied time. The dynamic contrast function does not operate
during measurement.
f When the time is not to be specied, press the <DEFAULT> button while [CALIBRATION TIME] is selected
(the time is not blinking) using as.
13) Press as to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].
14) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Displays the message during calibration.
[OFF] Does not display the message during calibration.
15) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 59
Interrelation of luminance and runtime
You can use the projector with desired brightness and duration of use by combining the settings of [MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL], [LIGHT OUTPUT], and [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].
Interrelation of luminance and runtime is as follows. Make the initial setting (operation setting) depending on your
desired duration of use and brightness of the projected image.
Values of the luminance and runtime are rough estimations.
r To set the projector based on the duration of use
Duration of use
(hour)
When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF] When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]
[MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL]
(%)
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
(%)
Luminance (lm)
[MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL]
(%)
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
(%)
Luminance (lm)
20 000 100.0 100.0 12 000 100.0 58.0 7 000
24 000 100.0 83.0 10 000 100.0 54.0 6 500
27 000 100.0 65.0 7 800 100.0 51.0 6 100
31 000 100.0 100.0 47.0 5 600
35 000 100.0 100.0 44.0 5 300
40 000 100.0 100.0 41.0 4 900
r To set the projector based on luminance
Luminance (lm)
When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF] When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]
[MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL]
(%)
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
(%)
Runtime (hour)
[MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL]
(%)
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
(%)
Runtime (hour)
12 000 100.0 100.0 20 000
11 000 100.0 92.0 23 000 100.0 92.0 1 500
10 000 100.0 83.0 24 000 100.0 83.0 4 500
9 000 100.0 75.0 25 500 100.0 75.0 8 500
8 000 100.0 67.0 26 500 100.0 67.0 14 000
7 000 100.0 58.0 28 000 100.0 58.0 20 000
6 000 100.0 50.0 29 500 100.0 50.0 28 000
5 000 100.0 100.0 42.0 38 500
4 000 100.0 100.0 33.0 52 500
Note
f Under inuence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation environment, etc., the runtime may be shorter than the
estimation.
f The duration of use is referred to as the runtime when you use the projector successively. The duration of use is an estimated duration and
is not the warranty period.
f If the runtime exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
60 - ENGLISH
Initial setting (installation setting)
Set [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode. Refer to “Installation mode” (x page 34) for
details.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[PROJECTION METHOD].
1) Press qw to switch the setting.
3/7
ENTER
SET
CHANGE
Change the projection method if the screen display is
upside down or inverted.
PROJECTION METHOD
FRONT/FLOOR
INITIAL SETTING
2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (standby mode)
Set the operation mode during standby mode. The factory default setting is [NORMAL], which allows you to use
the network function during standby mode. To keep power consumption low during standby mode, set this function
to [ECO]. After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[STANDBY MODE].
1) Press qw to switch the setting.
4/7
When set to ECO, network functions and SERIAL OUT
terminal, and some RS-232C commands are not
available during standby.
INITIAL SETTING
SET
CHANGE
STANDBY MODE
NORMAL
ENTER
2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Note
f The preceding initial setting screen is displayed when the projector is switched on for the rst time after purchase. When [ALL USER DATA]
is executed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [INITIALIZE], the [STANDBY MODE] setting before execution is displayed.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 61
Initial setting (screen setting)
Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image. After completed the initial setting, you can
change the settings of each item from the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SCREEN SETTING].
1) Press as to select an item.
2) Press qw to switch the setting.
16:9
5/7
SCREEN POSITION
Set as necessary for the screen in use.
INITIAL SETTING
SET
CHANGEMENU SELECT
SCREEN FORMAT
ENTER
3) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (time zone)
Set [TIME ZONE] in accordance with the country or region where you use the projector.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [DATE
AND TIME]. The current settings are displayed in [LOCAL DATE] and [LOCAL TIME].
1) Press qw to switch the setting.
+09:00
6/7
20XX/01/01
123456
LOCAL DATE
LOCAL TIME
Please set up a time zone according to the area of your
country or region.
INITIAL SETTING
SET
CHANGE
TIME ZONE
ENTER
2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Note
f In the factory default setting, the time zone of the projector is set to +09:00 (Japan and Korean Standard Time). Change the setting in the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [DATE AND TIME] [TIME ZONE] to the time zone of the region where you use the projector.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
62 - ENGLISH
Initial setting (date and time)
Set the local date and time. After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu [DATE AND TIME].
To set the date and time automatically, refer to “Setting the date and time automatically” (x page 136).
1) Press as to select an item.
20XX
7/7
1
1
12
34
56
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
SECOND
Please set the date and time of the built-in clock of the
projector.
INITIAL SETTING
SET
CHANGEMENU SELECT
YEAR
ENTER
2) Press qw to switch the setting.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f Conrm the setting value and complete the initial setting.
Making adjustments and selections
It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
1) 8)
5)
6)
3)
7) 9)
3)
2)
4)
1) 5) 7) 8) 9)2)
6)
1) Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly adjust the focus of the image. (x page 64)
2) Change the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the
installation mode. (x page 34)
f Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
3) Press the input selection button (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>, <HDMI>, <SDI 1/2>, or
<SDI>) to select the input signal.
4) Adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet. (x page 45)
5) Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the image position.
6) If the input signal is the analog RGB signal or the DVI-D/HDMI signal, press the <AUTO SETUP>
button.
7) Press the <ZOOM> button to adjust the image size to match the screen.
8) Press the <FOCUS> button again to adjust the focus.
9) Press the <ZOOM> button again to adjust the zoom and the image size to match the screen.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
ENGLISH - 63
Note
f When the projector is switched on for the rst time after purchase, as well as when [ALL USER DATA] is executed from the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu [INITIALIZE], the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts, then the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is
displayed. Refer to “When the initial setting screen is displayed” (x page 56) for details.
Switching off the projector
1)
2)
1)
4)
3)
2)
1) Press the power standby <v> button.
f The [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] conrmation screen is displayed.
2) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
(Or press the power standby <v> button again.)
f Projection of the image will stop, and the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body
lights in orange. (The fan keeps running.)
3) Wait for a few seconds until the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> of the projector body lights
up in red (fan is stopped).
4) Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn off the power.
Attention
f When switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures described. Failure to do so may damage the internal components and
result in malfunctions.
Note
f For approximately 15 seconds after the projector is switched off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is switched on.
f Even when the power standby <v> button is pressed and the projector is switched off, the projector consumes power if the main
power of the projector is on.
When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], use of some functions is restricted, but the power
consumption during standby can be conserved.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
64 - ENGLISH
Projecting
Check the projection lens attachment (x page 46), external device connection (x page 48), power cord
connection (x page 54), switch on the power (x page 55) to start projecting. Select the video for projection,
and adjust appearance of the projected image.
Selecting the input signal
Select an input signal.
1) Press the input selection button (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <DVI-D>, <HDMI>, <SDI 1/2>, or
<SDI>) on the remote control or the control panel.
f The image of the signal being input in the selected terminal is projected.
Attention
f Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back.
Set the [PICTURE] menu [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
f Conrm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu
[ASPECT].
How to adjust focus, zoom, and shift
If the projected image or the position is not correct when the positioning of the projector and the screen is correctly
installed, adjust the focus, zoom, and shift.
This section describes the adjustment method when anything other than the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.:
ET-D75LE90) is used. When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is used, refer to “Adjusting the lens
position and focus when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is used” (x page 65).
Using the control panel
1) Press the <LENS> button on the control panel.
f Pressing the button changes the adjustment screen in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].
2) Select each item and press asqw to adjust it.
Using the remote control
1) Press the lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) on the remote control.
f <FOCUS> button: Adjusts focus.
f <ZOOM> button: Adjusts zoom.
f <SHIFT> button: Adjusts shift.
2) Select each item and press asqw to adjust it.
CAUTION
During the lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in any opening around the lens.
Your hand may be caught in between, resulting to injury.
Note
f When the projection lens without the zoom function is attached, the zoom adjustment screen will be displayed. However, operation is not
possible.
f When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE50) is used, do not use the shift adjustment, and use the projector with the lens position
at the home position. (x page 66)
f The adjustment can be performed faster by pressing and holding asqw for approximately three seconds or longer while adjusting the
focus and shift.
f It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.
f Only [FOCUS] is shown in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the projector is not focused and
displayed characters are unreadable. (Factory default)
The display color of [FOCUS] depends on the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] [OSD DESIGN].
f When the power is switched off during focus and shift adjustment, lens calibration needs to be performed the next time the power is
switched on. (x page 140)
f When the main power is switched off during focus adjustment, lens calibration is performed automatically during the next focus adjustment.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
ENGLISH - 65
f When the main power is switched off during shift adjustment, a lens calibration error screen will be displayed during the next shift
adjustment. Execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [LENS CALIBRATION].
f When the lens calibration error is displayed even though [LENS CALIBRATION] was executed, ask your dealer to repair the unit.
Adjusting the lens position and focus when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.:
ET-D75LE90) is used
After attaching the projection lens, adjust the lens position and the focus with the projector correctly installed
against the screen.
The focus balance between the center and periphery of the projected image will differ depending on the size of
the projected image when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is attached. Adjust the focus balance of
the periphery with the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) as necessary.
1) Move the lens to the ET-D75LE90 lens standard position.
f While the shift adjustment screen is displayed, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to
display the [HOME POSITION] screen. Select [D75LE90] to move the lens to the lens standard position.
Refer to “Setting the lens position” (x page 66) for details.
2) Adjust the focus at the center of projected image.
f For the steps to adjust the focus, refer to “How to adjust focus, zoom, and shift” (x page 64).
3) Loosen the lock screw and turn the periphery focus adjustment ring by hand to adjust the focus in
the periphery of the screen.
Periphery focus adjustment ring
Lock screw
4) Check the focus at the center of the image again and make fine adjustments.
5) Tighten the lock screw.
f Periphery focus adjustment ring is xed.
Note
f The projected image size and scale shown on the periphery focus adjustment ring are an approximate guide.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
66 - ENGLISH
Setting the lens position
To move the lens position to the home position or the lens standard position, perform the following procedure.
1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the shift adjustment screen is displayed.
f The [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed.
LENS
HOME POSITION
EXECUTE
CANCEL
ENTER
MENU
NORMAL
CHANGE
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL]
Moves the lens to the home position.
Select this item when replacing or removing the projection lens. Select this item when the Fixed-focus
Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE50) is used for projection.
[D75LE90]
Moves the lens to the ET-D75LE90 lens standard position.
Select this item when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is used for projection.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f [PROGRESS] is displayed in the [HOME POSITION] screen, and the lens position returns to the home
position or the lens standard position.
Note
f Complete the operation within approximately 5 seconds after the [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed. The [HOME POSITION] screen
will disappear after time limit.
f The home position of the lens is used when the lens is being replaced or when the projector is being stored, and it is not the optical center of
the screen.
f You can also display the [HOME POSITION] screen by pressing the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the
remote control for at least three seconds.
Adjustment range by the lens position shift (optical shift)
Perform the lens position shift within the adjustment range.
The focus may change when the lens position is shifted out of the adjustment range. This is because the shift
of the lens is restricted to protect the optical parts. Projection position can be adjusted with the optical axis shift
function based on the position of the projected image in the home position (standard projection position) or the
position of the projected image in the ET-D75LE90 lens standard position (reference projection position).
r For PT-RZ12K
Projection lens Model No.
ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20,
ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40
ET-D75LE6 ET-D75LE90
Projected image width H
Standard projection position
Projected image height V
0.2 H 0.2 H
0.12 V 0.12 V
0.55 V
0.55 V
Projected image width H
Standard projection position
Projected image height V
0.15 H
0.15 H
0.12 V
0.12 V
0.44 V
0.44 V
Projected image width H
Reference projection position
0.06 H
0.06 H
Projected image height V
0.05 V
0.73 V (standard position)
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
ENGLISH - 67
r For PT-RS11K
Projection lens Model No.
ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20,
ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40
ET-D75LE6
Projected image width H
Standard projection position
Projected image height V
0.3 H
0.3 H
0.1 V
0.1 V
0.5 V
0.5 V
Projected image width H
Standard projection position
Projected image height V
0.2 H
0.2 H
0.4 V
0.4 V
0.12 V
0.12 V
Note
f When the optional Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE50) is attached, use it in the standard projection position without adjusting shift.
f When the optional Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is attached to the PT-RS11K, use it in the reference projection position
without adjusting shift.
Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus is unbalanced
Focus balance
Relationship between the tilt of the lens and the screen focus surface
When the projection lens is tilted in contrast with the image forming surface, tilting the front side (screen side)
of the projection lens downwards (in the direction of the dotted arrow line), the upper side of the screen focus
surface will tilt inwards and the lower side will tilt outwards as shown in the example.
Projection lens
Image forming surface
Screen focus surface
How to adjust the focus balance (adjustment by tilting the lens mounter)
When the entire screen surface is not uniform even if the focus has been adjusted, the lens mounter has focus
adjustment screws in three locations.
f Tool used: Hex driver or Allen wrench (diagonal 2.5 mm (3/32"))
f The Allen wrench is included with the projection lens ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8.
Lens mounter structure
Focus adjustment screws (a), (b), and (c) can be turned to move the lens mount bracket back and forth.
Also, tightening the xed screws locks the lens mount bracket in place so it does not move.
When a projection lens with a large weight is installed, or when the projector is installed on an inclination, the
lens may tilt and the focus may become unbalanced. In these cases, perform adjustment by referring to the
relationship between the adjustment location and adjustment screws.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
68 - ENGLISH
r Front view diagram of the lens mounter (viewed from the screen side)
(a)
(b) (c)
Lens mount bracket
Fixing screws
Note
f Focus adjustment screws (a), (b), and (c) are adjusted with the lens attached.
Adjustment procedure
r Relationship between the adjustment location and adjustment screws
(b) (c)
(b)+(c)
(a)
Adjustment location:
Location where the just focus point of the screen is in the
inner side of the screen
When the just focus point of
the screen in V up (top in the
vertical direction) is in the inner
side of the screen
When the just focus point of the
screen in V bottom (bottom in
the vertical direction) is in the
inner side of the screen
When the just focus point of
the screen in H left (left in the
horizontal direction) is in the
inner side of the screen
When the just focus point of the
screen in H right (right in the
horizontal direction) is in the
inner side of the screen
(a) Rotate counterclockwise
(b) Rotate counterclockwise Rotate counterclockwise
(c) Rotate counterclockwise Rotate counterclockwise
1) Press the <FOCUS> button on the remote control or the <LENS> button on the control panel to
display the focus adjustment screen.
2) Press s to shift the focus of the entire screen once.
3) Press a to stop on any part of the screen to be the first just focus point.
f For the location where focus is shifted in this state, the just focus point is on the inner side of the screen.
4) Loosen the fixed screws in the position relative to the location where the focus is shifted the most
(the location where the just focus point is shifted the most towards the inner side in Step 2)) up to two
rotations.
f Turn screws clockwise in two locations, or at least in one location when making an adjustment.
5) Slowly turn the focus adjustment screws corresponding to the locations counterclockwise and stop
where the image is in focus. (x page 67)
f If the screws are turned counterclockwise, the tilt of the lens will change by moving the lens mount bracket
of the lens mounter forward (screen side), and in the projected image on the screen, the focus point in the
opposite direction of the adjustment screws will move from the inner side of the screen to the outside.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Projecting
ENGLISH - 69
6) Press the <SHIFT> button on the remote control or the <LENS> button on the control panel to display
the shift adjustment menu, and reset the screen position of the projected image on the screen surface
back to an optimal state.
7) Perform focus adjustment again near the center of the screen and if it is still not enough, fine tune the
amount of rotation of the adjustment screws.
8) When adjustments have been made, securely tighten the loosened fixing screws.
9) Adjust the focus again using the remote control.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
70 - ENGLISH
Operating with the remote control
Switching the input
The input for projection can be switched. Method to switch the input is as follows.
f Press the input selection button and directly specify the input to project.
f Display the input selection screen and select the input to project from the list.
button
Switching the input directly
The input for projection can be switched by directly specifying it.
1) Press the input selection button (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <VIDEO>, <S-VIDEO Y/C>, <DIGITAL LINK>,
<DVI-D>, <HDMI>, <SDI>).
f This operation can be also performed using the buttons on the control panel.
<RGB1>
<VIDEO>
<S-VIDEO Y/C>
Switches the input to RGB1.
<RGB2> Switches the input to RGB2.
<DIGITAL LINK> Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
<DVI-D> Switches the input to DVI-D.
<HDMI> Switches the input to HDMI.
<SDI>
Switches the input to SDI1 or SDI2. Switches to the other input when one input has already been
selected. Also, input selection can be xed to SDI1 or SDI2 using the [SECURITY] menu
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
ENGLISH - 71
Note
f When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal, the input on the DIGITAL LINK output supported device changes each time the <DIGITAL LINK> button is pressed. The input
can also be changed using the RS-232C control command.
For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers, switch the input on the projector to DIGITAL LINK, and then switch the input on
the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
f Congure [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [RGB IN] (x page 112) to match the signal to be input to the
<RGB 1 IN> terminal.
Switching the input by displaying the input selection screen
The input for projection can be selected by displaying the input selection screen.
1) Press the <INPUT MENU> button.
f The input selection screen is displayed.
INPUT SELECT
RGB1
RGB2
DVI-D
HDMI
DIGITAL LINK
SDI1
SDI2
SELECT
SET
ENTER
2) Press the <INPUT MENU> button again.
f The input will switch each time you press the <INPUT MENU> button.
Note
f Input can be switched by selecting the input to project by pressing as and pressing the <ENTER> button while the input selection screen
is displayed.
f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed when the <INPUT MENU> button is pressed while in the P IN P. (x page 146)
f If the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the projector, the input
selection menu for the DIGITAL LINK output supported device is displayed when the <ENTER> button is pressed while the DIGITAL LINK
input is selected in the input selection screen.
f If the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the projector, the DIGITAL
LINK logo and the input name selected in the DIGITAL LINK output supported device are displayed in the display section of the [DIGITAL
LINK] in the input selection screen.
f Congure [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [RGB IN] (x page 112) to match the signal to be input to the
<RGB 1 IN> terminal.
Using the shutter function
If the projector is not used for a certain period of time during the meeting intermission, for example, it is possible
to turn off the image temporarily.
button
1) Press the <SHUTTER> button.
f The image disappears.
f This operation can be also performed using the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel.
2) Press the <SHUTTER> button again.
f The image is displayed.
Note
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink slowly in green while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed).
f You can set whether to use the mechanical shutter or not and the time for the fade in/fade out of the image using the [DISPLAY OPTION]
menu [SHUTTER SETTING].
f If [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SHUTTER SETTING] (x page 121) is set to [DISABLE], the light source
may be lit dimly due to warm-up when the shutter function is used while the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F).
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
72 - ENGLISH
Using the on-screen display function
Turn off the on-screen display function (no display) when you do not wish the viewers to see the on-screen
display, such as the menu or the input terminal name.
button
1) Press the <ON SCREEN> button.
f The on-screen display disappears.
2) Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.
f The on-screen display appears.
Note
f If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the on-screen
display is turned on.
Using the automatic setup function
The automatic setup function can be used to automatically adjust the resolution, clock phase, and image position
when analog RGB signals consisting of dots such as computer signals are being input, or to automatically adjust
the image position when DVI-D/HDMI signals are input. It is recommended to input an image with bright white
borders at the edges and high-contrast black and white characters when the automatic setup is being performed.
Avoid using images that include halftones or gradation, such as photographs and computer graphics.
button
1) Press the <AUTO SETUP> button.
f [COMPLETE] is displayed when it has completed without any problem.
f This operation can be also performed using the <AUTO SETUP> button on the control panel.
Note
f The clock phase may shift even if it has completed without any incident. In such cases, adjust the [POSITION] menu [CLOCK PHASE]
(x page 92).
f If an image with blurred edges or a dark image is input, [INCOMPLETE] may appear or adjustment may not be performed properly even
when [COMPLETE] appears. In this case, adjust the settings in the [ADVANCED MENU] menu [INPUT RESOLUTION] (x page 96),
[POSITION] [CLOCK PHASE] (x page 92), and [SHIFT] (x page 90).
f Adjust special signals according to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [AUTO SETUP] (x page 109).
f Automatic adjustment may not work depending on the model of the computer.
f Automatic adjustment may not work for a synchronization signal of C-SY or SYNC ON GREEN.
f Images may be disrupted for a few seconds during automatic adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
f Adjustment is required for each input signal.
f Automatic adjustment can be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button during the automatic adjustment operation.
f Even if a signal possible to perform the automatic setup is being input, it may not be able to adjust correctly if the automatic setup function
is used while the moving image is being input. [INCOMPLETE] may be displayed, or the adjustment may not be completed correctly even if
[COMPLETE] is displayed.
Switching the image aspect ratio
Switch the image aspect ratio according to the input.
button
1) Press the <ASPECT> button.
f The setting will change each time you press the button.
Note
f Refer to the [POSITION] menu [ASPECT] (x page 90) for details.
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
ENGLISH - 73
Using the function button
The <FUNCTION> button of the remote control can be used as a simplied shortcut button by assigning the
following functions: [P IN P], [SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM SELECTOR], [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW], [FREEZE],
[WAVEFORM MONITOR], [LENS MEMORY LOAD], [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP], [PROJECTION METHOD]
button
1) Press the <FUNCTION> button.
Note
f Assignment of the function is performed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 140).
Displaying internal test pattern
The projector has eight types of internal test patterns to check the condition of the projector body. To display test
patterns, perform the following steps.
button
1) Press the <TEST PATTERN> button.
2) Press qw to select the test pattern.
Note
f Setting is also available from the [TEST PATTERN] (x page 148) menu.
f Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing
various adjustments.
Using the status function
Display the status of the projector.
button
1) Press the <STATUS> button.
f The [STATUS] screen is displayed.
100000h
100000h / 100000h
1.00 / 1.00
1/5
31°C/87°F
27°C/80°F
31°C/87°F
31°C/87°F
31°C/87°F
1013hPa
MENU
EXITCHANGE
ENTER
SEND E-MAIL
SELF TEST
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE
AUTO - FLOOR
NO ERRORS
COOLING CONDITION
AROUND LIGHT2 TEMP.
AROUND LIGHT1 TEMP.
EXHAUST AIR TEMP.
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.
INTAKE AIR TEMP.
MAIN/SUB VERSION
LIGHT RUNTIME
PROJECTOR RUNTIME
PROJECTOR TYPE
STATUS
RZ12K(123456789012)
Note
f This can be displayed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STATUS] (x page 142).
Chapter 3Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
74 - ENGLISH
Using the AC voltage monitor function
The value of input supply voltage can be displayed on the self-diagnosis display at the side of the projector.
r To display during projection
1) Press the power on <b> button.
f The value of the input supply voltage is displayed only as numeric value on the self-diagnosis display.
f The display will turn off automatically after approximately 3 seconds.
r To display during standby mode
1) Press the power standby <v> button.
f The value of the input supply voltage is displayed only as numeric value on the self-diagnosis display.
f The display will turn off automatically after approximately 3 seconds.
Note
f It can be set using the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [AC VOLTAGE MONITOR] (x page 143).
f The value of input supply voltage cannot be displayed in the self-diagnosis display during standby when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[STANDBY MODE] (x page 134) is set to [ECO].
f Operation can also be performed by the power on <b> button or power standby <v> button on the control panel.
Setting ID number of the remote control
When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector
individually using a single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
After setting the ID number of the projector, set same ID number on the remote control.
The factory default ID number of the projector is set to [ALL]. When using a single projector, press the <ID
ALL> button on the remote control. Also, you can control a projector by pressing the <ID ALL> button on
the remote control even if you do not know the projector ID.
button
1) Press the <ID SET> button on the remote control.
2) Within five seconds, press and set the one-digit or two-digit ID number set on the projector body
using the number (<0> - <9>) buttons.
f If you press the <ID ALL> button, you can control the projectors regardless of the ID number setting of the
projector body.
Attention
f Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector body, do not press the <ID SET> button on the remote control
carelessly. If the <ID SET> button is pressed and no number (<0> - <9>) buttons are pressed within ve seconds, the ID number returns to
its original value before the <ID SET> button was pressed.
f The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again. However, it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead
batteries. Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced.
Note
f When the ID number of the remote control is set to [0], you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector
body, as same as when [ALL] is set.
f Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [PROJECTOR ID].
ENGLISH - 75
Chapter 4 Settings
This chapter describes the settings and adjustments you can make using the on-screen menu.
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
76 - ENGLISH
Menu navigation
The on-screen menu (Menu) is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector.
Navigating through the menu
Operating procedure
button
1) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.
f The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
3D SETTINGS
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
P IN P
ENTER
2) Press as to select an item from the main menu.
f The selected item is highlighted in yellow.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
3D SETTINGS
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
P IN P
ENTER
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.
0
POSITION
SHIFT
ASPECT
ZOOM
CLOCK PHASE
GEOMETRY
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
DEFAULT
ENTER
OFF
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
ENGLISH - 77
4) Press as to select a sub-menu, and press qw or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings.
f Some items will switch in order as follows each time you press qw.
A B C
f For some items, press qw to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.
0
CONTRAST
ADJUST
Note
f Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.
f Depending on the signals to be input to the projector, some items or functions may not be adjusted or used. When the items cannot be
adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set. [DIGITAL CINEMA
REALITY] and [FRAME LOCK] may not be displayed depending on the input signal.
If the item in the menu screen is displayed in black characters and the item cannot be adjusted or set, the factor causing it is displayed by
pressing the <ENTER> button while the corresponding menu is selected.
f Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.
f Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately ve seconds.
f For menu items, refer to “Main menu” (x page 77) and “Sub-menu” (x page 78).
f The cursor color depends on the settings of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] [OSD DESIGN]. The selected
item is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.
f In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
To display the on-screen menu in portrait, go to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] (x page 118) and change the
[OSD ROTATION] setting.
Resetting adjustment values to the factory default
If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to
the factory default settings.
button
1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
0
CONTRAST
ADJUST
Note
f You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.
f To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu item to the factory default one at a time, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[INITIALIZE] (x page 144).
f Some items cannot be reset to the factory default settings even when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed. Adjust those
items individually.
f The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular
mark varies according to the selected input signals.
Current adjustment value
Factory default setting
Main menu
The following items are in the main menu.
When a main menu item is selected, the screen changes to a sub-menu selection screen.
Main menu item Page
[PICTURE] 82
[POSITION] 90
[ADVANCED MENU] 95
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
78 - ENGLISH
Main menu item Page
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] 101
[3D SETTINGS] 102
[DISPLAY OPTION] 107
[PROJECTOR SETUP] 125
[P IN P] 146
[TEST PATTERN] 148
[SIGNAL LIST] 149
[SECURITY] 152
[NETWORK] 156
Sub-menu
The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the sub-menu.
[PICTURE]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[PICTURE MODE] [STANDARD]
*1
82
[CONTRAST] [0]
*2
82
[BRIGHTNESS] [0]
*2
83
[COLOR] [2]
*2
83
[TINT] [-2]
*2
83
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] [DEFAULT]
*2
83
[GAMMA] [DEFAULT]
*2
85
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] [OFF]
*2
86
[SHARPNESS] [8]
*2
86
[NOISE REDUCTION] [2]
*2
87
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] [2]
*2
87
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] [YP
B
P
R
]
*1
88
*1 Depends on the signal input.
*2 Depends on the [PICTURE MODE].
[POSITION]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[SHIFT] 90
[ASPECT] [DEFAULT]
*1
90
[ZOOM] 91
[CLOCK PHASE] [0]
*1
92
[GEOMETRY] [OFF] 92
*1 Depends on the signal input.
[ADVANCED MENU]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] [AUTO]
*1
95
[BLANKING] 95
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
ENGLISH - 79
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[INPUT RESOLUTION] 96
[CLAMP POSITION] [24]
*1
96
[EDGE BLENDING] [OFF] 97
[FRAME RESPONSE] [NORMAL] 98
[FRAME CREATION] [2] 99
[FRAME LOCK] 99
[RASTER POSITION] 100
*1 Depends on the signal input.
Note
f Sub-menu items and factory default settings vary depending on the selected input terminal.
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]
Details (x page 101)
[3D SETTINGS]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[3D SYSTEM SETTING] [SINGLE] 102
[3D SYNC SETTING] 102
[3D INPUT FORMAT] [AUTO]
*1
103
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] [NORMAL] 103
[3D COLOR MATCHING] [SHARED 2D/3D] 103
[3D PICTURE BALANCE] 104
[DARK TIME SETTING] [1.5ms] 104
[3D FRAME DELAY] [0us] 105
[3D TEST MODE] [NORMAL] 105
[3D TEST PATTERN] 105
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE] [ON] 106
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] 106
*1 Varies depending on the selected input terminal.
[DISPLAY OPTION]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[COLOR MATCHING] [OFF] 107
[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION] [OFF] 108
[SCREEN SETTING] 108
[AUTO SIGNAL] [OFF] 109
[AUTO SETUP] 109
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING] 110
[SIMUL INPUT SETTING] 111
[RGB IN] 112
[DVI-D IN] 113
[HDMI IN] 114
[DIGITAL LINK IN] 115
[SDI IN] 117
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 118
[IMAGE ROTATION] [OFF] 120
[BACK COLOR] [BLUE] 120
[STARTUP LOGO] [DEFAULT LOGO] 120
[UNIFORMITY] 121
[SHUTTER SETTING] 121
[FREEZE] 123
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
80 - ENGLISH
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] [OFF] 123
[CUT OFF] 124
[PROJECTOR SETUP]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[PROJECTOR ID] [ALL] 125
[PROJECTION METHOD] [FRONT/FLOOR] 125
[OPERATION SETTING] 125
[LIGHT OUTPUT] [100.0%] 129
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] 130
[STANDBY MODE] [NORMAL] 134
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] [DISABLE] 134
[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] [DISABLE] 134
[INITIAL STARTUP] [LAST MEMORY] 135
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT] [LAST USED] 135
[DATE AND TIME] 135
[SCHEDULE] [OFF] 136
[RS-232C] 138
[REMOTE2 MODE] [DEFAULT] 140
[FUNCTION BUTTON] 140
[LENS CALIBRATION] 140
[LENS MEMORY] 141
[STATUS] 142
[AC VOLTAGE MONITOR] [OFF] 143
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] 144
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] 144
[INITIALIZE] 144
[SERVICE PASSWORD] 145
[P IN P]
Details (x page 146)
[TEST PATTERN]
Details (x page 148)
[SIGNAL LIST]
Details (x page 149)
[SECURITY]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[SECURITY PASSWORD] [OFF] 152
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 152
[DISPLAY SETTING] [OFF] 152
[TEXT CHANGE] 153
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 153
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 154
Chapter 4Settings — Menu navigation
ENGLISH - 81
[NETWORK]
Sub-menu item Factory default Page
[DIGITAL LINK MODE] [AUTO] 156
[DIGITAL LINK SETUP] 156
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS] 157
[NETWORK SETUP] 157
[NETWORK CONTROL] 158
[NETWORK STATUS] 158
[DIGITAL LINK MENU] 159
[Art-Net SETUP] [OFF] 159
[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] [2] 159
[Art-Net STATUS] 160
Note
f Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector.
When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or
set.
f Sub-menu items and factory default settings vary depending on the selected input terminal.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
82 - ENGLISH
[PICTURE] menu
On the menu screen, select [PICTURE] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
[PICTURE MODE]
You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the
projector is used.
1) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2) Press qw.
f The [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[STANDARD] The image becomes suitable for moving images in general.
[CINEMA] The image becomes suitable for movie contents.
[NATURAL] The image is sRGB compliant.
[DICOM SIM.] The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.
[DYNAMIC] The light output is maximized for use in bright areas.
[GRAPHIC] The image becomes suitable for input from the personal computer.
[USER] Set any desired picture mode.
Note
f The factory default picture mode is [GRAPHIC] for still image input signals and [STANDARD] for movie-based input signals.
f DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the
DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images.
f Press the <ENTER> button when each [PICTURE MODE] is selected to save as a specied value when a new signal is input. The data of
all items except [SYSTEM SELECTOR] in the [PICTURE] menu is saved.
f In the factory default settings, [USER] is set to images that comply with the ITU-R BT.709 standard.
Changing the [USER] name
1) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2) Press qw to select [USER].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [PICTURE MODE] detailed screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
5) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
6) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The picture mode name is changed.
[CONTRAST]
You can adjust the contrast of the colors.
1) Press as to select [CONTRAST].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press w.
The screen becomes brighter.
-
31 - +31
Press q.
The screen becomes darker.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 83
Attention
f Adjust [BRIGHTNESS] rst when you need to adjust the black level.
[BRIGHTNESS]
You can adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press w.
Increases the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
-
31 - +31
Press q.
Reduces the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
[COLOR]
You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [COLOR].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press w.
Deepens colors.
-
31 - +31
Press q.
Weakens colors.
[TINT]
You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image.
1) Press as to select [TINT].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press w.
Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color.
-
31 - +31
Press q.
Adjusts skin tone toward reddish purple.
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.
Adjusting with color temperature
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Factory default setting.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
84 - ENGLISH
[USER1]
Adjusts white balance as desired. Refer to “Adjusting desired white balance” (x page 84) for
details.
[USER2]
[3200K] - [9300K] Allows you to set in increments of 100 K. Select so that images become natural.
Note
f When [PICTURE MODE] (x page 82) is set to [USER] or [DICOM SIM.], [DEFAULT] cannot be selected.
f When [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 107) adjustment is set to other than [OFF], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is xed to [USER1].
f The color temperature numerical values are guidelines.
Adjusting desired white balance
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].
8) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.
9) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
10) Press qw to adjust the level.
Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
[RED]
Press w.
Deepens red.
[WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 - +255 (factory default is
+255)
[WHITE BALANCE LOW]:
-
127 - +127 (factory default is
0)
Press q.
Weakens red.
[GREEN]
Press w.
Deepens green.
Press q.
Weakens green.
[BLUE]
Press w.
Deepens blue.
Press q.
Weakens blue.
Note
f Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
Adjusting desired white balance based on existing color temperature settings
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select an item other than [DEFAULT], [USER1], and [USER2].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CHANGE TO *****] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [USER1] or [USER2].
f The status of the color temperature changed is saved to the selected item.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 85
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
7) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [USER1] or [USER2] data is overwritten.
f If you press qw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the data will not be overwritten.
f The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen is displayed.
8) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
9) Press qw to adjust the level.
Note
f Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
f When color temperature has been changed, the colors before and after the change will differ slightly.
Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]
1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The name set to color temperature is changed.
Note
f When a name is changed, display of [USER1], [USER2] is also changed.
[GAMMA]
You can switch gamma mode.
1) Press as to select [GAMMA].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
*1
Factory default setting.
[USER1]
Allows you to change the name.
Refer to “Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]” (x page 86) for details.
[USER2]
[DICOM SIM.] The picture becomes similar to that of DICOM standard.
[1.0]
Set so that images become as you like. [2.0] - [2.8] can be set in increments of 0.1.[1.8]
[2.0] - [2.8]
*1 When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC], [USER], or [DICOM SIM.], [DEFAULT] cannot be selected.
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
86 - ENGLISH
Note
f DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the
DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images.
Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]
1) Press as to select [GAMMA].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [GAMMA] screen is displayed.
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [GAMMA NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
6) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
7) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The selected gamma name is changed.
Note
f When a name is changed, display of [USER1], [USER2] is also changed.
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light.
1) Press as to select [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] - [6] Corrects the vividness of the image. The larger the value, the stronger the correction.
[SHARPNESS]
You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.
1) Press as to select [SHARPNESS].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press w.
Contours become sharper.
0 - +15
Press q.
Contours become softer.
Note
f If you press w while the adjustment value is [+15], the value will become [0]. If you press q while the adjustment value is [0], the value will
become [+15].
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 87
[NOISE REDUCTION]
You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.
1) Press as to select [NOISE REDUCTION].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] No correction.
[1] Slightly corrects the noise.
[2] Moderately corrects the noise.
[3] Strongly corrects the noise.
Attention
f When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from what it originally was. In such a case, set it to [OFF].
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
Light adjustment of the light source and signal compensation are performed automatically according to the image
to make the contrast optimum for the image.
1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the dynamic contrast function.
[1] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a small extent.
[2] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a moderate extent.
[3] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a large extent.
[USER]
Set any desired correction.
Refer to “Performing desired correction” (x page 87) for details.
Performing desired correction
1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to select [USER].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.
Setting item Details
[AUTO CONTRAST]
(Automatic light source
adjustment)
[OFF] Does not adjust the light source.
[1] - [255]
The higher the value, the stronger the light adjustment of the light
source.
Can be set in increments of 1.
[BRIGHT SIGNAL LEVEL]
(Setting of the brightness level
of the signal to start the light
adjustment)
[6%] - [50%]
Adjusts the light source when the brightness level of the video
signal being input gets lower than the set value. The higher the
value, the larger the range to perform the light adjustment of the
light source.
Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 30 %)
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
88 - ENGLISH
Setting item Details
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER]
(Time setting until the light turns
off)
[DISABLE] Does not turn off the light source.
[0.0s] - [10.0s]
Turns off the light source when the brightness level of the video
signal being input goes under the value set in [LIGHTS OUT
SIGNAL LEVEL].
Select an item from [0.0s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.0s] -
[4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL
LEVEL]
(Setting of the brightness level
of the signal to turn off the light)
[0%] - [5%]
Set the level of the brightness of the video signal to turn off the light
source with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 0 %)
[MANUAL INTENSITY]
(Manual light source
adjsutment)
[0] - [255]
The larger the value, the stronger the correction.
Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 255)
[DYNAMIC GAMMA]
(Adjustment of signal
compensation)
[OFF] Does not compensate the signal.
[1] Slightly compensates the signal.
[2] Moderately compensates the signal.
[3] Strongly compensates the signal.
Note
f [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] cannot be set when [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to [DISABLE].
f When [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again
from the state that the light source has turned off by this function.
g When the brightness level of the video signal being input has exceeded the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]
g When the input signal is gone
g When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
g When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up
f When [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], it will take approximately 0.5 seconds to turn the light source back on
again from the state that the light source has turned off by this function.
f When the image of analog signal is projected, the image may be affected by the signal noise while the brightness level of the video signal is
detected. In this case, even when the brightness level of the image falls below the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL], it is judged
that the brightness level is not below the value as a signal.
Analog signal refers to Y/C signal, YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signal, and analog RGB signal.
f When [DYNAMIC GAMMA] is set to [3], the contrast will be maximized.
f The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not
operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
The projector will automatically detect the input signal, but you can set the system method manually when an
unstable signal is input. Set the system method matching the input signal.
1) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press as to select a system format.
f Select the system format using asqw when the signal is input to the <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals.
f Available system formats vary depending on the input signal.
Terminal System format
<R/P
R
/VIDEO> terminal, <G/
Y>/<B/P
B
/C> terminal
Select [AUTO], [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL], [PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].
Set it to [AUTO] normally. (Setting [AUTO] will automatically select [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL],
[PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].)
Switch the setting to the signal method for the TV used.
<RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2
IN> terminal
480i, 576i, or 576p signal Select [RGB] or [YC
B
C
R
].
VGA60 or 480p signal Select [VGA60], [480p YC
B
C
R
], or [480p RGB].
Other movie-based signals Select [RGB] or [YP
B
P
R
].
<DVI-D IN> terminal
480i, 576i, 480p, or 576p
signal
Select [RGB] or [YC
B
C
R
].
Other movie-based signals Select [RGB] or [YP
B
P
R
].
<HDMI IN> terminal, <DIGITAL
LINK/LAN> terminal
480i, 576i, 480p, or 576p
signal
Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YC
B
C
R
].
Other movie-based signals Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YP
B
P
R
].
Chapter 4Settings — [PICTURE] menu
ENGLISH - 89
Terminal System format
<SDI IN 1> terminal, <SDI IN
2> terminal
For single link
Select [AUTO], [480i YC
B
C
R
], [576i YC
B
C
R
], [720/50p YP
B
P
R
],
[720/60p YP
B
P
R
], [1035/60i YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24p YP
B
P
R
],
[1080/24sF YP
B
P
R
], [1080/25p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/30p YP
B
P
R
],
[1080/50i YP
B
P
R
], [1080/60i YP
B
P
R
], [1080/50p YP
B
P
R
],
[1080/60p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/24p RGB], [1080/24sF RGB],
[1080/25p RGB], [1080/30p RGB], [1080/50i RGB], or
[1080/60i RGB].
For dual link
Select [AUTO], [1080/24p RGB], [2K/24p RGB], [2K/24p XYZ],
[1080/24sF RGB], [2K/24sF RGB], [2K/24sF XYZ], [1080/25p RGB],
[1080/30p RGB], [1080/50i RGB], [1080/60i RGB], [1080/50p
RGB], [1080/60p RGB], [1080/50p YP
B
P
R
], [1080/60p YP
B
P
R
],
[2K/48p RGB], [2K/48p YP
B
P
R
], [2K/50p RGB], [2K/50p YP
B
P
R
],
[2K/60p RGB], or [2K/60p YP
B
P
R
].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 206) for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector.
f This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
sRGB-compliant video
sRGB is an international standard (IEC61966-2-1) for color reproduction dened by IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission).
Set according to the following steps to reproduce more faithful, sRGB compliant colors.
1) Set [COLOR MATCHING] to [OFF].
f Refer to [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 107).
2) Display the [PICTURE] menu.
f Refer to “[PICTURE] menu” (x page 82).
3) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
4) Press qw to set [NATURAL].
5) Press as to select [COLOR].
6) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to set the factory default setting.
7) Follow Steps 5) to 6) to set [TINT], [COLOR TEMPERATURE], [GAMMA], and [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT
VIEW] to the factory default settings.
Note
f sRGB is available for RGB signal input only.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
90 - ENGLISH
[POSITION] menu
On the menu screen, select [POSITION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
Note
f When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal, adjust the shift, aspect, and clock phase from the menu of DIGITAL LINK output supported device at rst.
[SHIFT]
Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image projected on the screen is still out of position even
when the positions of the projector and screen are correct.
1) Press as to select [SHIFT].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHIFT] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to adjust the position.
Orientation Operation Adjustment
Vertical (up and down)
adjustment
Press a.
The image position moves up.
Press s.
The image position moves down.
Horizontal (right and left)
adjustment
Press w.
The image position moves to the right.
Press q.
The image position moves to the left.
Note
f For the portrait setting, image position is moved horizontally when “Vertical (up and down) adjustment” is made. Image position is moved
vertically when “Horizontal (right and left) adjustment” is made.
[ASPECT]
You can switch the aspect ratio of the image.
The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in [SCREEN SETTING]. Set [SCREEN SETTING]
rst. (x page 108)
1) Press as to select [ASPECT].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
ENGLISH - 91
[VID AUTO]
*1
The projector identies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signals and displays the image by
automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for NTSC
signals.
[AUTO]
*2
The projector identies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signals and displays the image by
automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for 480i/480p
signals.
[THROUGH] Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.
[16:9]
Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9 when standard signals are input
*3
. When
wide-screen signals are input
*4
, the images are displayed without changing the aspect ratio.
[4:3]
Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input
*3
. When wide-
screen signals are input
*4
, and [4:3] is selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed by
converting the aspect ratio to 4:3. When anything other than [4:3] is selected in [SCREEN FORMAT],
the images are reduced to be displayed without changing input aspect ratio so that the images will t
in the 4:3 screen.
[H FIT]
Displays images using the entire width of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
signals have the aspect ratio vertically longer than the screen aspect ratio selected in [SCREEN
FORMAT], the images are displayed with the top and bottom parts cut off.
[V FIT]
Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in
[SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the right and left parts cut off.
[HV FIT]
Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of
the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio
converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].
*1 During video signals and Y/C signal (NTSC) input only
*2 During RGB signal (480i, 480p) input
*3 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.
*4 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.
Note
f Some size modes are not available for certain types of input signals. [DEFAULT] cannot be selected for video signal, Y/C signal (NTSC), or
RGB (480i, 480p) signal.
f If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals.
Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.
f If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that
adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original
copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio
adjustment and zoom function.
f If conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not
be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the
creator of the images.
[ZOOM]
You can adjust the image size.
When [ASPECT] is set to other than [DEFAULT] and [THROUGH]
1) Press as to select [ZOOM].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON]
Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
same magnication.
5) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].
f If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
6) Press qw to adjust.
Note
f When [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
92 - ENGLISH
When [ASPECT] is set to [DEFAULT]
1) Press as to select [ZOOM].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MODE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[INTERNAL] Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
[FULL] Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
5) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON]
Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
same magnication.
7) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].
f If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
8) Press qw to adjust.
Note
f When [ASPECT] is not set to [DEFAULT], [MODE] is not displayed.
[CLOCK PHASE]
You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when there is a ickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press as to select [CLOCK PHASE].
2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
f The [CLOCK PHASE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to adjust.
f Adjustment value will change between [0] and [+31]. Adjust so that the amount of interference is at a
minimum.
Note
f Some signals may not be adjusted.
f Optimal value may not be achieved if the output from the input computer is unstable.
f Optimal value may not be achieved when there is a shift in the total dot numbers.
f [CLOCK PHASE] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
f [CLOCK PHASE] cannot be adjusted when a digital signal is input.
f If you press w while the adjustment value is [+31], the value will become [0]. If you press q while the adjustment value is [0], the value will
become [+31].
[GEOMETRY]
You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image.
Unique image processing technology enables projection of a square image on a special screen shape.
1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Does not perform geometric adjustment.
[KEYSTONE] Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.
[CORNER CORRECTION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.
[CURVED] Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
ENGLISH - 93
[PC-1]
*1
Performs geometric adjustment using a computer.[PC-2]
*1
[PC-3]
*1
*1 Advanced skills are necessary to use a computer to control geometric adjustment. Consult your dealer. Up to three geometric adjustments
performed using the computer can be saved.
Setting [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED]
1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2) Press qw to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY:CURVED] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the item to adjust.
5) Press qw to adjust.
[KEYSTONE]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio for the lens used.
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical
direction.
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal
direction.
[CURVED]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio for the lens used.
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL ARC] [HORIZONTAL ARC]
Chapter 4Settings — [POSITION] menu
94 - ENGLISH
[CURVED]
[VERTICAL BALANCE]
[HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
[MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO]
Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.
Setting [CORNER CORRECTION]
1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2) Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press asqw to adjust.
[CORNER CORRECTION]
[UPPER LEFT]
[UPPER RIGHT] [LOWER LEFT] [LOWER RIGHT]
[LINEARITY]
Horizontal direction
Vertical direction
Note
f The menu or logo may run off the screen when [GEOMETRY] is set.
f If [EDGE BLENDING] (x page 97) adjustment and [GEOMETRY] are used together, correct edge blending adjustment may not be
possible in certain environments.
f The optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) can be used to expand the correctable range. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.
f The image may disappear for a moment while performing adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
ENGLISH - 95
[ADVANCED MENU] menu
On the menu screen, select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
You can increase the vertical resolution and enhance the image quality by performing cinema processing when
the PAL (or SECAM) 576i signal, the NTSC 480i signal, and 1080/50i, 1080/60i are input.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Automatically detects the input signal and performs cinema processing.
[OFF] Does not perform cinema processing.
[30p FIXED]
During 480i or 1080/60i signal
input
Performs forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown).
[25p FIXED]
During 576i or 1080/50i signal
input
Note
f In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY], the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p
FIXED]. (Vertical resolution will degrade.)
f [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set when [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST].
[BLANKING]
You can adjust the blanking width if there are noises at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out
from the screen while an image from the VCR or other devices are projected.
1) Press as to select [BLANKING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BLANKING] adjustment screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT].
f When [CUSTOM MASKING] is set to anything other than [OFF] ([PC-1], [PC-2], or [PC-3]), the blanking
width can be adjusted to any shape using the computer. Up to three blanking settings adjusted using the
computer can be saved.
To use the [CUSTOM MASKING] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To
purchase the product, consult your dealer.
4) Press qw to adjust the blanking width.
Blanking correction Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Top of the screen [UPPER]
Press q.
The blanking zone
moves upward.
PT-RZ12K: Top to bottom
0 - 599
PT-RS11K: Top to bottom
0 - 524
Press w.
The blanking zone
moves downward.
Bottom of the
screen
[LOWER]
Press w.
The blanking zone
moves upward.
Press q.
The blanking zone
moves downward.
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
96 - ENGLISH
Blanking correction Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Left side of the
screen
[LEFT]
Press w.
The blanking zone
moves to the right.
PT-RZ12K: Left to right
0 - 959
PT-RS11K: Left to right
0 - 699
Press q.
The blanking zone
moves to the left.
Right side of the
screen
[RIGHT]
Press q.
The blanking zone
moves to the right.
Press w.
The blanking zone
moves to the left.
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when there is a ickering image or smeared outlines.
1) Press as to select [INPUT RESOLUTION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [INPUT RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [TOTAL DOTS], [DISPLAY DOTS], [TOTAL LINES], or [DISPLAY LINES], and press
qw to adjust each item.
f Values corresponding to the signal being input are displayed automatically for each item. Increase or
decrease the displayed values and adjust to the optimal point viewing the screen when there are vertical
stripes or sections are missing from the screen.
Note
f Previously mentioned vertical banding will not occur with all white signal input.
f The image may be disrupted while performing the adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
f [INPUT RESOLUTION] can be adjusted only when an RGB signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
f Some signals may not be adjusted.
[CLAMP POSITION]
You can adjust the optimal point when the black part of the image is blunt or it has turned green.
1) Press as to select [CLAMP POSITION].
2) Press qw to adjust.
Status Rough guide for optimal value Range of adjustment
The black part is blunt.
The point where bluntness of the black part improves the most is
the optimal value.
1 - 255
The black part is green.
The point where the green part becomes black, and the bluntness
has improved is the optimal value.
Note
f [CLAMP POSITION] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.
f Adjustment is not available depending on the signal.
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
ENGLISH - 97
[EDGE BLENDING]
The edge blending function allows multiple projector images to be seamlessly overlapped by using the inclination
of the brightness at the overlapped area.
1) Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Sets the edge blending function to off.
[ON] Use the setting value preset in the projector for the inclination of the edge blending area.
[USER]
Use the user-setting value for the inclination of the edge blending area. (Conguration/registration
requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)
f To adjust edge blending, proceed to Step 3).
3) When [ON] or [USER] is selected, press the <ENTER> button.
f The [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to specify the location to be corrected.
f When joining at top: Set [UPPER] to [ON]
f When joining at bottom: Set [LOWER] to [ON]
f When joining at left: Set [LEFT] to [ON]
f When joining at right: Set [RIGHT] to [ON]
5) Press qw to switch to [ON].
6) Press as to select [START] or [WIDTH].
7) Press qw to adjust the starting position or correction width.
8) Press as to select [MARKER].
9) Press qw to switch to [ON].
f A marker for image position adjustment is displayed. The position where the red and green lines overlap for
the projectors to be joined will be the optimal point. Make sure to set the correction width for the projectors
to be joined with the same value. Optimal joining is not possible with projectors that have different
correction widths.
The optimal point is the point at which these lines overlap.
Green line
Red line
10) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST].
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen is displayed.
f By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] on the [EDGE BLENDING] screen, the black test pattern is
displayed when you enter the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.
12) Press as to select [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
13) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed.
f [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
98 - ENGLISH
14) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
f Once the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST]
screen.
15) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] in [BLACK BORDER WIDTH].
16) Press qw to set the region (width) of the [BLACK BORDER WIDTH] adjustment.
17) Press as to select [UPPER KEYSTONE AREA], [LOWER KEYSTONE AREA], [LEFT KEYSTONE
AREA], or [RIGHT KEYSTONE AREA].
18) Press qw to adjust the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK
BORDER LEVEL].
19) Press as to select [BLACK BORDER LEVEL].
20) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] screen is displayed.
f [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
21) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
f Once the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BLACK BORDER LEVEL]
screen.
22) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] for [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
23) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed.
f [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
24) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
[BLACK BORDER WIDTH] (Right)
Projection range Edge blending [WIDTH] (Right)
[MARKER] (Red)
Edge blending [START] (Right)
([MARKER] (Green))
[BLACK BORDER LEVEL]
[OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] (Right)
[NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL]
Note
f [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] is a function that makes the increased brightness in black level of the overlapping image area difcult to notice
when [EDGE BLENDING] is used to congure multiple screens. The optimal point of correction is set by adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED
BLACK LEVEL] so the black level of the overlapping image area will be the same level as the non-overlapping area. If the border area of the
part where the image is overlapping and the non-overlapping part gets brighter after adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL], adjust
the width of the top, bottom, left, or right. Adjust [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] when the width adjustment makes only the border area darker.
f The joining part may look discontinuous depending on the position you are looking from when a screen with high gain or rear screen is used.
f When conguring multiple screens using both horizontal and vertical edge blending, adjust [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] rst before
making adjustments in Step 12). Adjustment method is same as the procedure of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
f If only horizontal or vertical edge blending is used, set all items in [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] to 0.
f The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] setting changes synchronizing with [AUTO TESTPATTERN] of [COLOR MATCHING].
f Adjustment of the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is a function to perform
the adjustment of [GEOMETRY] (x page 92) together with the edge blending. If [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] is tilted by
correcting the keystone from [KEYSTONE] in [GEOMETRY], perform Steps 17) and 18) to adjust the edge blending according to the shape
of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
[FRAME RESPONSE]
Set image frame delay.
1) Press as to select [FRAME RESPONSE].
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
ENGLISH - 99
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL] Standard setting.
[FAST]
*1
Simplies the image processing to reduce image frame delay.
[FIXED]
*2
Sets image frame delay to be constant regardless of the image position or magnication.
*1 When input signals are other than interlaced signals, [FAST] cannot be set.
*2 Only when moving image signals and still image signals with the vertical scanning frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz are input
Note
f [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set when [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST].
f [FRAME RESPONSE] cannot be set during P IN P.
[FRAME CREATION]
Set the amount of image frame interpolation.
The image with fast movement can be displayed more smoothly by automatically generating the intermediate
frame from the previous and next frame.
1) Press as to select [FRAME CREATION].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the frame creation function.
[1] Sets the amount of interpolation weaker.
[2] Sets the amount of interpolation midway. (Factory default)
[3] Sets the amount of interpolation stronger.
Note
f The effect may be difcult to notice depending on the image.
f Switch the setting when the image looks unnatural due to delay of image or generation of noise.
f [FRAME CREATION] is disabled and cannot be selected when [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST].
f [FRAME CREATION] is disabled and cannot be selected when the [3D SETTINGS] menu [3D SYSTEM SETTING] (x page 102) is set
to [DUAL (LEFT)] or [DUAL (RIGHT)].
f [FRAME CREATION] is disabled and cannot be selected when the [3D SETTINGS] menu [3D INPUT FORMAT] (x page 103) is set to
[AUTO], [SIMULTANEOUS], [SIDE BY SIDE], [TOP AND BOTTOM], [LINE BY LINE], or [FRAME SEQUENTIAL]. In [AUTO], however, this
only occurs when 3D format can be recognized.
f The [FRAME CREATION] setting will be disabled and cannot be selected when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SIMUL INPUT SETTING]
(x page 111) is set to [AUTO(3D)] or [AUTO(2D)] and the image in simultaneous format is displayed.
f This function is disabled when the internal test pattern or [3D TEST PATTERN] is displayed.
[FRAME LOCK]
Set this function to display the image in 3D when the vertical scanning frequency of the signal is 25 Hz, 50 Hz,
and 100 Hz.
1) Press as to select [FRAME LOCK].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Decreases the ickering of the displayed image.
[ON] Synchronizes the displayed image to the vertical scanning frequency of the input signal.
Note
f [FRAME LOCK] is not displayed when a signal with the vertical scanning frequency other than the above is input or 2D images are
displayed.
f The image may icker when [FRAME LOCK] is set to [ON].
f The displayed image may look discontinuous when [FRAME LOCK] is set to [OFF].
Chapter 4Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
100 - ENGLISH
[RASTER POSITION]
This will allow the position of the image to move within the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not
using the whole display area.
1) Press as to select [RASTER POSITION].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to adjust the position.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
ENGLISH - 101
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main menu, and display the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
Changing the display language
You can select the language of the on-screen display.
1) Press as to select the display language and press the <ENTER> button.
ENTER
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
SELECT
SET
f Various menus, settings, adjustment screens, control button names, etc., are displayed in the selected
language.
f The language can be changed to English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese, Chinese,
Russian, or Korean.
Note
f The on-screen display language of the projector is set to English by default as well as when [ALL USER DATA] (x page 144) in
[INITIALIZE] is executed.
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
102 - ENGLISH
[3D SETTINGS] menu
On the menu screen, select [3D SETTINGS] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
[3D SYSTEM SETTING]
Set the image display method to be used during 3D signal input, according to the 3D system in use.
1) Press as to select [3D SYSTEM SETTING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[SINGLE]
During 3D signal input, images for the left eye and right eye are alternately displayed using the frame
sequential format.
[DUAL (LEFT)] Only images for the left eye are displayed during 3D signal input.
[DUAL (RIGHT)] Only images for the right eye are displayed during 3D signal input.
Note
f When 2D images are input, 2D images are displayed regardless of the [3D SYSTEM SETTING] settings.
[3D SYNC SETTING]
Set the way in which the <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal and the <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal will be used.
Attention
f Before connecting external devices to the <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal and the <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal using cables, complete the
[3D SYNC MODE] setting and conrm that the external devices to be connected are turned off.
f Changing the [3D SYNC MODE] setting while the cables are connected may result in malfunctions of the projector or the connected external
devices.
1) Press as to select [3D SYNC SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The precaution message related to [3D SYNC SETTING] is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3D SYNC SETTING] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [3D SYNC MODE].
5) Press qw to switch the item.
[3D SYNC MODE] Details to be set in [3D SYNC1] Details to be set in [3D SYNC2]
[OFF] Not used. Not used.
[1] 3D trigger output Stereo synch output
[2] 3D trigger output 3D trigger output
[3] Stereo synch input Through 3D SYNC1
[4] Stereo synch input Stereo synch output
[5] Stereo synch input 3D trigger output
[6] Frame synch input Through 3D SYNC1
[7] Frame synch input Stereo synch output
[8] Frame synch input 3D trigger output
[9] 3D trigger output Frame synch output
[10] Stereo synch output Frame synch output
[11] 3D IR TRANSMITTER (+) output 3D IR TRANSMITTER (
-
) output
6) When [1], [4], [7], or [10] is selected, press as to select [STEREO SYNC OUTPUT DELAY], and press
qw to set the amount of delay for output.
[0us] - [25000us] Sets the amount in 10 us increments.
f To synchronize multiple projectors to display 3D images, use a frame synch input and output.
Select [9] or [10] for the rst projector.
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
ENGLISH - 103
Select [6], [7], or [8] for the second and subsequent projectors.
f Stereo synchronization is a signal having a 50 % duty cycle where High is for the left eye and Low is for
the right eye.
f “H” is output to the 3D image display and “L” is output to the 2D image display from the terminal for which
3D trigger output is selected.
Note
f [11] in [3D SYNC MODE] is the setting when the 3D IR transmitter TY-3DTRW of Panasonic (production discontinued) is used with the
projector. Consult your dealer regarding the connection method.
[3D INPUT FORMAT]
Set the 3D format for the image signals being input.
Set a 3D format that matches the input signal.
1) Press as to select [3D INPUT FORMAT].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3D INPUT FORMAT] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a 3D format.
[AUTO]
*1
Automatically detects 3D format of input image signals to display images.
[NATIVE] Forcibly displays 2D images regardless of input image signals.
[SIMULTANEOUS]
*2
Forcibly displays 3D images in simultaneous format regardless of input video signals.
[SIDE BY SIDE] Forcibly displays 3D images in side by side format regardless of input image signals.
[TOP AND BOTTOM] Forcibly displays 3D images in top and bottom format regardless of input image signals.
[LINE BY LINE]
*3
Forcibly displays 3D images in line by line format regardless of input video signals.
[FRAME SEQUENTIAL]
*4
Forcibly displays 3D images in frame sequential format regardless of input image signals.
*1 Only during DVI-D or HDMI input
*2 Only during 3G-SDI level B input
*3 Only while signals other than interlaced signals are input
*4 Only while progressive signals with the vertical scanning frequency of 100 Hz or 120 Hz are input to the <RGB1>/<RGB2>/<DVI-D> terminals
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f When [AUTO], [SIMULTANEOUS], [SIDE BY SIDE], [TOP AND BOTTOM], [LINE BY LINE], or [FRAME SEQUENTIAL] is set, 3D images
are not displayed with the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SIMUL INPUT SETTING]. In [AUTO], however, this only occurs when 3D format
can be recognized.
f This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
Display images by inverting the timing when the left and right images are swapped. Change the setting when
there is something wrong with the 3D image being viewed.
1) Press as to select [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL] Do not change the [NORMAL] setting if the 3D images are displayed correctly.
[SWAPPED] Select this item when left and right 3D images are swapped to be displayed.
Note
f This function is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to anything other than [SINGLE].
[3D COLOR MATCHING]
Switch the color matching correction data applied to displayed image.
1) Press as to select [3D COLOR MATCHING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
104 - ENGLISH
[SHARED 2D/3D] Uses same correction data for 2D signal and 3D signal.
[SEPARATE 2D/3D] Uses different correction data for 2D signal and 3D signal.
Note
f Switch the setting of [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 107) while the signal to be adjusted is being input.
[3D PICTURE BALANCE]
Correct the difference when the images for left eye and right eye have different brightness or color.
1) Press as to select [3D PICTURE BALANCE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3D PICTURE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
f Using the left eye image as a reference, the right eye image is corrected using the set value.
f For [3D WAVEFORM MONITOR], the images for the left eye and right eye are split horizontally on the left
and right, and waveforms are displayed.
[CONTRAST] Adjusts the contrast of colors.
[WHITE BALANCE HIGH
RED]
Adjusts the red color of the white balance high.
[WHITE BALANCE HIGH
GREEN]
Adjusts the green color of the white balance high.
[WHITE BALANCE HIGH
BLUE]
Adjusts the blue color of the white balance high.
[BRIGHTNESS] Adjusts the dark (black) part of the projected image.
[WHITE BALANCE LOW RED] Adjusts the red color of the white balance low.
[WHITE BALANCE LOW
GREEN]
Adjusts the green color of the white balance low.
[WHITE BALANCE LOW
BLUE]
Adjusts the blue color of the white balance low.
[COLOR] Adjusts the color saturation.
[TINT] Adjusts the skin tone in the projected image.
[CLOCK PHASE] Adjusts the image when there is ickering in the image or blur of the outline.
[3D WAVEFORM MONITOR]
[OFF] Does not display the 3D waveform monitor.
[ON] Displays the 3D waveform monitor.
Note
f The [CLOCK PHASE] setting is enabled during simultaneous input of RGB1 and RGB2, and is adjusted against the right eye image.
f This function is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to anything other than [SINGLE].
f This function is disabled when [3D TEST PATTERN] is displayed.
f This function is disabled when [3D TEST MODE] is set to anything other than [NORMAL].
f The 3D waveform monitor is displayed only when the [3D PICTURE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
f The normal waveform monitor cannot be displayed when the 3D image is displayed.
[DARK TIME SETTING]
Set the black display period that is displayed between the right eye image and the left eye image to match the 3D
system in use.
1) Press as to select [DARK TIME SETTING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[0.5ms]
Sets an item so that 3D setting is made correctly.
[1.0ms]
[1.5ms]
[2.0ms]
[2.5ms]
[2.7ms]
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
ENGLISH - 105
Note
f This function is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to anything other than [SINGLE].
f The crosstalk may get larger or the displayed image may get darker when the setting does not match with the 3D system in use.
[3D FRAME DELAY]
Adjust the timing of the left-right switch of an image.
1) Press as to select [3D FRAME DELAY].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[0us] - [25000us] Sets the amount in 10 us increments.
f The adjustment range depends on the input signal.
[3D TEST MODE]
Set the image display mode for use with 3D system adjustments.
1) Press as to select [3D TEST MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[NORMAL] Normal setting.
[LEFT/LEFT] Displays the image of the left eye input signal for both the left and right eye image.
[RIGHT/RIGHT] Displays the image of the right eye input signal for both the left and right eye images.
[LEFT/BLACK]
Displays the image of the left eye input signal for the left eye image, and all black images for the right
eye image.
[BLACK/RIGHT]
Displays all black images for the left eye image, and the image of the right eye input signal for the
right eye image.
Note
f The [3D TEST MODE] setting returns to [NORMAL] when the projector is switched off.
f This function is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to anything other than [SINGLE].
f This function is disabled when [3D TEST PATTERN] is displayed.
[3D TEST PATTERN]
The 3D test pattern can be used to check operation and make adjustments even without a 3D signal.
1) Press as to select [3D TEST PATTERN].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
Menu screen + input screen
Select a test pattern that is easy to check operation or make adjustment.
Menu screen + left: white/
right: black
Menu screen + left: black/
right: white
Note
f When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [RGB IN] [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] (x page 112) is set to [VIDEO] or [Y/C], the 3D test pattern
cannot be displayed while the <RGB 1 IN> terminal is selected.
f This function is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to anything other than [SINGLE].
Chapter 4Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu
106 - ENGLISH
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE]
Set to show or hide the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.
1) Press as to select [SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Shows the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.
[OFF] Hides the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.
Note
f If [OFF] is set, the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing is not displayed when the projector is switched on.
f A conrmation screen is displayed when switched from [ON] to [OFF]. Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button to change
the setting to [OFF].
Attention
f If 3D images are viewed by unspecied number of people for commercial use, display the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing
to notify viewers.
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]
Show the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing.
1) Press as to select [3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] screen is displayed.
f Press qw to switch the page.
1/2
2/2
3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
If you view 3D images, please note below.
In addition, when 3D images will be viewed
by unspecified number of people
or used for commercial applications,
someone in authority should convey
the following precautions.
To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably,
please refer to the Operating Instructions
for in-depth description.
CHANGE
EXIT
3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please refrain from viewing 3D images
if you do not feel well or are experiencing
visual fatigue.
Please use the contents which has been
properly made for 3D.
View from at least the recommended distance.
(3 times the effective height of the screen)
Refer to the Operating Instructions
if this message is no longer needed.
CHANGE
EXIT
MENU MENU
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 107
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
[COLOR MATCHING]
Correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously.
Adjusting the color matching as desired
1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Color matching adjustment is not carried out.
[3COLORS] Adjusts the three colors [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
[7COLORS] Adjusts the seven colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE].
[709MODE]
Refer to “Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter” (x page 107) for details about this mode.
[MEASURED]
3) Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] ([RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA],
[YELLOW], or [WHITE] for [7COLORS]).
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [3COLORS:RED], [3COLORS:GREEN], or [3COLORS:BLUE] screen is displayed.
For [7COLORS], the [7COLORS:RED], [7COLORS:GREEN], [7COLORS:BLUE], [7COLORS:CYAN],
[7COLORS:MAGENTA], [7COLORS:YELLOW], or [7COLORS:WHITE] screen is displayed.
f By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.
6) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
7) Press qw to adjust.
f The adjustment value changes between 0 and 2 048.
Note
f Operation when correcting the adjustment color
When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed: The luminance of the adjustment color changes.
When correction color red is changed: Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color green is changed: Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color blue is changed: Blue is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
f Since advanced skills are necessary for the adjustment, this adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector
or by a service person.
f Pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control will restore the factory default settings for all items.
f When [COLOR MATCHING] is set to other than [OFF], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is xed to [USER1].
f By setting [3D COLOR MATCHING] (x page 103), you can set whether to congure separate settings for 2D signal and 3D signal, or to
use common data.
f Either [NATIVE] or [3D] is displayed at the top right of the menu when separate settings are used for 2D signal and 3D signal.
Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter
Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity coordinates and luminance to change the colors [RED],
[GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] to desired colors.
1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].
2) Press qw to select [709MODE] or [MEASURED].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [709MODE] or [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
108 - ENGLISH
4) Press as to select [MEASURED DATA].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [MEASURED DATA] screen is displayed.
6) Measure the current luminance (Y) and the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) using the colorimeter.
7) Press as to select a color, and press qw to adjust the setting.
f Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.
8) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.
f The [709MODE] or [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.
f When [MEASURED] is selected in Step 2), proceed to Step 9) and enter the coordinates of desired colors.
9) Press as to select [TARGET DATA].
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [TARGET DATA] screen is displayed.
11) Press as to select a color and press qw to input coordinates for desired colors.
f By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.
12) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.
Note
f When [709MODE] is selected in [COLOR MATCHING], the ITU-R BT.709 standard three primary colors are set as target data.
f Colors are not displayed properly when target data is a color outside the region of this projector.
f The [709MODE] may differ slightly from the ITU-R BT.709 standard colors.
f Set the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to automatically display a test pattern for use in adjusting the selected adjustment colors.
f Before using a colorimeter or similar instrument to measure measurement data, set [PICTURE MODE] to [DYNAMIC].
f A difference in the color coordinates of target data and measurement values obtained from an instrument may occur for certain instruments
and measurement environments used.
f [AUTO TESTPATTERN] settings change together with the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] of [EDGE BLENDING].
[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION]
Corrects the phenomenon in which colors that appear lighter when viewed on a large screen viewed from a close
distance compared to when viewed on an average screen size so that colors appear the same.
1) Press as to select [LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Performs no correction.
[1] Performs weak correction.
[2] Performs strong correction.
[SCREEN SETTING]
Set the screen size.
Correct to the optimum image position for the set screen when the aspect ratio of a projected image is changed.
Set as necessary for the screen in use.
1) Press as to select [SCREEN SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press qw to switch the [SCREEN FORMAT] item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
Model No. [SCREEN FORMAT] Range when [SCREEN POSITION] is selected
PT-RZ12K
[16:10] Cannot be adjusted.
[4:3] Adjusts the horizontal position between
-
160 and 160.
[16:9] Adjusts the vertical position between
-
60 and 60.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 109
Model No. [SCREEN FORMAT] Range when [SCREEN POSITION] is selected
PT-RS11K
[4:3] Cannot be adjusted.
[16:9] Adjusts the vertical position between
-
132 and 131.
4) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].
f [SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to the following
item.
PT-RZ12K: [16:10]
PT-RS11K: [4:3]
5) Press qw to adjust [SCREEN POSITION].
[AUTO SIGNAL]
Set whether to execute automatic setup of signals automatically.
The screen display position or signal level can be adjusted automatically without pressing the <AUTO SETUP>
button on the remote control on each occasion if you input unregistered signals frequently at meetings, etc.
1) Press as to select [AUTO SIGNAL].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Sets the auto signal function to off.
[ON]
Executes automatic setup automatically when images are changed to unregistered signals during
projection.
[AUTO SETUP]
Set this when adjusting a special signal or horizontally long (such as 16:9) signal.
Setting with [MODE]
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MODE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[WIDE]
Select this item when an image aspect ratio is a wide-screen signal, which does not meet the
[DEFAULT] setting.
[USER] Select this item when receiving a signal with a special horizontal resolution (number of display dots).
f When [DEFAULT] or [WIDE] is selected, proceed to Step 7).
f When [USER] is selected, proceed to Step 5).
5) Press as to select [DISPLAY DOTS], and press qw to adjust [DISPLAY DOTS] to the horizontal
resolution of the signal source.
6) Press as to select [MODE].
7) Press the <ENTER> button.
f Automatic adjustment is executed. [PROGRESS] is displayed while in automatic adjustment. When
completed, the screen returns to the [AUTO SETUP] screen.
Adjusting position automatically
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
110 - ENGLISH
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [POSITION ADJUST].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[ON] Adjust the screen position and size when automatic setup is executed.
[OFF] Does not perform automatic adjustment.
Adjusting signal level automatically
1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Does not perform automatic adjustment.
[ON]
Adjusts black level (on-screen menu [BRIGHTNESS]) and white level (on-screen menu
[CONTRAST]) when automatic setup is executed.
Note
f [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] may not function properly unless a still image containing clear blacks and whites is input.
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input
signal is disrupted.
1) Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT MODE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the backup function.
[1]
Enables the backup function between the DVI-D input and the HDMI input.
The input is switched as seamless as possible when the same signal is input to the primary and
secondary inputs.
Primary input is xed to the <DVI-D IN> terminal, and the secondary input is xed to the <HDMI IN>
terminal.
[2]
Enables the backup function between the SDI1 input and the SDI2 input.
The input is switched as seamless as possible when the same signal is input to the primary and
secondary inputs.
Primary input is xed to the <SDI IN 1> terminal, and the secondary input is xed to the <SDI IN 2>
terminal.
5) Press as to select [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING].
f When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [OFF], [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] cannot be selected.
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ENABLE] Switches to the secondary input automatically when the input signal for primary input is disrupted.
[DISABLE] Disables the automatic input switching function.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 111
Note
f Backup function is enabled when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [1], and the same signal is input to the <DVI-D IN> and <HDMI IN>
terminals.
Alternatively, the backup function is enabled when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [2], and same signal is input to the <SDI IN 1> terminal
and the <SDI IN 2>.
f To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function, make sure that the following three conditions are satised to be ready to use
the function.
g Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to anything other than [OFF].
g Input the same signal to the primary and secondary inputs.
g Display the image of the primary input.
f If the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use, the state of readiness to use
the backup function is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again, switch to the primary input.
f [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displayed in the input guide (x page 118) and [STATUS] screen (x pages 73, 142) when [BACKUP
INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When switching to the backup input signal is possible using the backup function, [ACTIVE] is displayed in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS]. When
it is not possible, [INACTIVE] is displayed instead.
When [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is [ACTIVE] while the image of the primary input is displayed, the secondary input becomes the backup
input.
When [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is [ACTIVE] while the image of the secondary input is displayed, the primary input becomes the backup
input.
f The input is switched seamlessly when the inputs of the DVI-D and the HDMI are switched while [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [1] and
switching to the backup input signal is possible.
f If [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [2], the input is switched seamlessly when the inputs of SDI1 and SDI2 are switched while switching to
the backup input signal is possible.
f When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is [ACTIVE], the signal is switched to the backup
input if the input signal is disrupted.
f When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE] and the signal is automatically switched to the backup input due to disruption of the
input signal, [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] changes to [INACTIVE]. In this case, switching to the backup input signal is not possible until the
original input signal is restored. If the signal is automatically switched to the backup input, switching to the backup input signal becomes
possible when the original input signal is restored. In this case, the current input is retained.
f [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] cannot be set during P IN P. The backup operation is not performed either.
f [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] cannot be set when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SIMUL INPUT SETTING] [HDMI/DVI-D] or [SDI1/
SDI2] is set to anything other than [OFF]. The backup operation is not performed either.
f [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] cannot be set when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [SDI IN] [SDI LINK] is set to [DUAL LINK] or [AUTO].
The backup operation is not performed either.
[SIMUL INPUT SETTING]
Set this function when the video signal in simultaneous format is input and used.
1) Press as to select [SIMUL INPUT SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SIMUL INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as button to select [RGB1/RGB2], [HDMI/DVI-D], or [SDI1/SDI2].
4) Press qw to switch the setting.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] This is not used for simultaneous input.
[AUTO(3D)] Displays 3D images of the simultaneous format.
[AUTO(2D)]
*1
Displays 2D image of the simultaneous format.
*1 This can be set only when [SIMUL INPUT SETTING] is set to [HDMI/DVI-D] or [SDI1/SDI2].
Note
f If [AUTO(2D)] is set, 2D images are displayed when the same 2D compatible signals are entered to each input.
f If [AUTO(3D)] is set, 3D images are displayed when the same 3D compatible signals are entered to each input.
f [SIMUL INPUT SETTING] cannot be set during P IN P.
f [SIMUL INPUT SETTING] cannot be set when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF].
f This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
f This may not function properly depending on the signal.
f Usage of each input signal is displayed in [RGB1] and [RGB2], in [HDMI] and [DVI-D], and in [SDI1] and [SDI2] of the [SIMUL INPUT
SETTING] screen when [AUTO(3D)] or [AUTO(2D)] is set.
[SIMUL INPUT SETTING] Usage of the input signal Details
[AUTO(3D)]
[LEFT INPUT]
Uses the signal for the corresponding input as a signal for the left
eye image.
[RIGHT INPUT]
Uses the signal for the corresponding input as a signal for the right
eye image.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
112 - ENGLISH
[SIMUL INPUT SETTING] Usage of the input signal Details
[AUTO(2D)]
*1
[1st FRAME INPUT]
Uses the signal for the corresponding input as a signal for the odd
frame.
[2nd FRAME INPUT]
Uses the signal for the corresponding input as a signal for the even
frame.
*1 This can be set only when [SIMUL INPUT SETTING] is set to [HDMI/DVI-D] or [SDI1/SDI2].
[RGB IN]
Set to match the signal to input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.
Setting [RGB1 INPUT SETTING]
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RGB1 INPUT SETTING].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[RGB/YP
B
P
R
] Select this item when an RGB signal or YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.
[VIDEO] Select this item when a video signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> (<R/P
R
/VIDEO>) terminal.
[Y/C]
Select this item when a luminance signal and color signal are input to the <RGB 1 IN> (<G/Y>, <B/P
B
/
C>) terminal.
Switching the slice level of an input sync signal
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] or [RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[LOW] Sets the slice level to [LOW].
[HIGH] Sets the slice level to [HIGH].
Setting [RGB2 EDID MODE]
1) Press as to select [RGB IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RGB IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RGB2 EDID MODE].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RGB2 EDID MODE] screen is displayed.
5) Press qw to switch [EDID MODE].
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[SCREEN FIT] Changes EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.
f When [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected, proceed to Step 10).
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 113
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].
f Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x768p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p],
[1440x900p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], or [1920x1200p].
8) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.
9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
f Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than [1920x1080p] or [1920x1080i] is selected for
[RESOLUTION].
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The setting details are displayed in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] of [EDID STATUS].
f The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.
f After conguring settings, your computer or video device or the projector may be required to be turned off and on.
f A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video
device.
[DVI-D IN]
Switch the setting when the external device is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal of the projector and the
image is not projected correctly.
1) Press as to select [DVI-D IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DVI-D IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [EDID SELECT].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[EDID3] Recognizes movie-based video signals and still image signals automatically.
[EDID1]
Select this item mainly when an external device that outputs movie-based video signals (such as a
Blu-ray disc player) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
[EDID2:PC]
Select this item mainly when an external device that outputs still image-based video signals (such as
a computer) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
5) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
[0-255:PC]
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI-D terminal of an external device (such as a
computer) is input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.
[16-235]
Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (Blu-ray disc
player, etc.) is input to the <DVI-D IN> terminal using a conversion cable, etc.
Note
f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
f The data for Plug and play will change when the setting is changed. Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 206) for a resolution that
supports plug and play.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
114 - ENGLISH
Setting [EDID MODE]
1) Press as to select [DVI-D IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DVI-D IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [EDID MODE].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DVI-D EDID MODE] screen is displayed.
5) Press qw to switch [EDID MODE].
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[SCREEN FIT] Changes EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.
f When [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected, proceed to Step 10).
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].
f Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x768p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p],
[1440x900p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], or [1920x1200p].
8) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.
9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
f Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than [1920x1080p] or [1920x1080i] is selected for
[RESOLUTION].
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The setting details are displayed in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] of [EDID STATUS].
f The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.
f After conguring settings, your computer or video device or the projector may be required to be turned off and on.
f A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video
device.
[HDMI IN]
Switch the setting when the external device is connected to the <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector and the
image is not projected correctly.
1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 115
[64-940]
Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (such as a Blu-
ray disc player) is input to the <HDMI IN> terminal.
[0-1023]
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI-D terminal of an external device (such as a
computer) is input to the <HDMI IN> terminal via a conversion cable or similar cable.
Select this item also when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of a computer or other device is
input to the <HDMI IN> terminal.
Note
f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
f The HDMI signal level is displayed for 30 bits of input.
Setting [EDID MODE]
1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [EDID MODE].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [HDMI EDID MODE] screen is displayed.
5) Press qw to switch [EDID MODE].
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[SCREEN FIT] Changes EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.
f When [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected, proceed to Step 10).
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].
f Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x768p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p],
[1440x900p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], or [1920x1200p].
8) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.
9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
f Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than [1920x1080p] or [1920x1080i] is selected for
[RESOLUTION].
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The setting details are displayed in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] of [EDID STATUS].
f The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.
f After conguring settings, your computer or video device or the projector may be required to be turned off and on.
f A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video
device.
[DIGITAL LINK IN]
Sets the signal level when DIGITAL LINK input is selected.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
116 - ENGLISH
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
[64-940]
Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (Blu-ray disc
player, etc.) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
[0-1023]
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI-D terminal or HDMI terminal of an external
device (such as a computer) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable
transmitter.
Note
f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
f The signal level is displayed for 30 bits of input.
Setting [EDID MODE]
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [EDID MODE].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK EDID MODE] screen is displayed.
5) Press qw to switch [EDID MODE].
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[SCREEN FIT] Changes EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.
f When [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected, proceed to Step 10).
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].
f Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x768p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p],
[1440x900p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], or [1920x1200p].
8) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.
9) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
f Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
f Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than [1920x1080p] or [1920x1080i] is selected for
[RESOLUTION].
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The setting details are displayed in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] of [EDID STATUS].
f The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 117
f After conguring settings, your computer or video device or the projector may be required to be turned off and on.
f A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video
device.
[SDI IN]
Set this function in accordance with the signal input to the <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals.
Setting [SDI LINK]
1) Press as to select [SDI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SDI LINK].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[SINGLE LINK] Sets the SDI1 input and the SDI2 input to single link.
[DUAL LINK] Sets the SDI1 input and the SDI2 input to dual link.
[AUTO] Automatically selects the single link or the dual link.
Note
f [SDI LINK] cannot be set when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [2].
f When [AUTO] is set, either single link or dual link will be automatically selected by reading the payload ID added to the input signal. Single
link will be selected when a payload ID is not added to the input signal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL]
Select the amplitude of the signal to input.
1) Press as to select [SDI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[64-940] Normally use this setting.
[4-1019] Select this item when gray is displayed as black.
Setting [BIT DEPTH]
1) Press as to select [SDI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BIT DEPTH].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[AUTO] Automatically select [12-bit] or [10-bit].
[12-bit] Fixes to [12-bit].
[10-bit] Fixes to [10-bit].
Setting [3G-SDI MAPPING]
1) Press as to select [SDI IN].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
118 - ENGLISH
3) Press as to select [3G-SDI MAPPING].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[AUTO] Automatically select [LEVEL A] or [LEVEL B].
[LEVEL A] Fixes to [LEVEL A].
[LEVEL B] Fixes to [LEVEL B].
Note
f This does not operate when the SD-SDI signal or the HD-SDI signal is input.
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
Set the on-screen display.
Setting [OSD POSITION]
Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OSD POSITION].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[2] Sets to the center left of the screen.
[3] Sets to the bottom left of the screen.
[4] Sets to the top center of the screen.
[5] Sets to the center of the screen.
[6] Sets to the bottom center of the screen.
[7] Sets to the upper right of the screen.
[8] Sets to the center right of the screen.
[9] Sets to the bottom right of the screen.
[1] Sets to the upper left of the screen.
Setting [OSD ROTATION]
Set the orientation of the menu screen (OSD).
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OSD ROTATION].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Does not rotate the screen.
[CLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° clockwise.
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° counterclockwise.
Setting [OSD DESIGN]
Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 119
3) Press as to select [OSD DESIGN].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[1] Sets to yellow.
[2] Sets to blue.
[3] Sets to white.
[4] Sets to green.
[5] Sets to peach.
[6] Sets to brown.
Setting [OSD MEMORY]
Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor.
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OSD MEMORY].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Holds the cursor position.
[OFF] Does not hold the cursor position.
Note
f The cursor position is not maintained even if [OSD MEMORY] is set to [ON].
Setting [INPUT GUIDE]
Set whether to display the input guide (input terminal name, signal name, memory number, and [BACKUP INPUT
STATUS] currently selected) in the position set in [OSD POSITION].
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INPUT GUIDE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Displays the input guide.
[OFF] Hides the input guide.
Setting [WARNING MESSAGE]
Set the display/hide of the warning message.
1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [WARNING MESSAGE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Displays the warning message.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
120 - ENGLISH
[OFF] Hides the warning message.
Note
f When [WARNING MESSAGE] is set to [OFF], the warning message will not be displayed on the projected image even if a warning status
such as [TEMPERATURE WARNING] or [CLEAN THE AIR FILTER] is detected. Also, the following countdown message is not displayed:
the message until the power is turned off after the no signal lights-out function is executed; the message until the light source is turned off
after the no signal lights-out function is executed
[IMAGE ROTATION]
Set whether to rotate the input image when projecting.
1) Press as to select [IMAGE ROTATION].
2) Press qw to select an item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Projects the input image without rotating.
[CLOCKWISE] Rotates the input image by 90° clockwise and project it.
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE] Rotates the input image by 90° counterclockwise and project it.
Note
f [IMAGE ROTATION] is disabled while displaying 3D image, displaying image in simultaneous format, and during P IN P.
f The on-screen display orientation does not change even when [IMAGE ROTATION] is set to other than [OFF]. Set the [DISPLAY OPTION]
menu [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] [OSD ROTATION] (x page 118) as necessary.
[BACK COLOR]
Set the display of the projected screen when there is no signal input.
1) Press as to select [BACK COLOR].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[BLUE] Displays the entire projection area in blue.
[BLACK] Displays the entire projection area in black.
[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
Note
f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
[STARTUP LOGO]
Set the logo display when the power is turned on.
1) Press as to select [STARTUP LOGO].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
[NONE] Disables the startup logo display.
Note
f When [USER LOGO] is selected, the display of the startup logo will be kept for approximately 15 seconds.
f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 121
[UNIFORMITY]
Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen.
Setting each color
1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [WHITE], [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
4) Press qw to adjust the level.
Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
[VERTICAL]
Press w.
The lower-side color becomes
pale, or the upper-side color
becomes dark.
-
127 - +127
Press q.
The upper-side color becomes
pale, or the lower-side color
becomes dark.
[HORIZONTAL]
Press w.
The left-side color becomes pale,
or the right-side color becomes
dark.
Press q.
The right-side color becomes
pale, or the left-side color
becomes dark.
Setting [PC CORRECTION]
To use the [PC CORRECTION] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To purchase
the product, consult your dealer.
1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [PC CORRECTION].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Does not perform correction using a computer.
[ON]
*1
Performs correction for the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen using a computer.
*1 Advanced skills are necessary to use computer control correction. Consult your dealer.
Note
f The [UNIFORMITY] setting value will not return to factory default even if [ALL USER DATA] is executed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu [INITIALIZE] (x page 144).
[SHUTTER SETTING]
Set the image fade-in and fade-out when the shutter function operates. You can also congure the setting to
automatically enable/disable the shutter (shutter: close/open) when the power is turned off/on, and to use the
mechanical shutter or not.
Setting [MECHANICAL SHUTTER]
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MECHANICAL SHUTTER].
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
122 - ENGLISH
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[ENABLE]
Turns off the light source and closes the mechanical shutter when the shutter function is enabled
(shutter: closed).
[DISABLE]
Leaves the mechanical shutter open and turns off only the light source when the shutter function is
enabled (shutter: closed).
Note
f By closing the mechanical shutter, the malfunction of the DLP chip caused by high power laser ray entering the projection lens surface can
be prevented. To close the mechanical shutter, set [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] to [ENABLE] and then set the shutter function to be enabled
(shutter: closed).
f When [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is set to [ENABLE], it will take approximately 0.5 seconds from when the shutter function is enabled
(shutter: closed) to the shutter function is disabled (shutter: opened).
f The light source may turn on darker to warm up when the shutter function is used when the operating environment temperature is around
0 °C (32 °F) when [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is set to [DISABLE].
Setting [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT]
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
Item Adjustment
[FADE-IN]
[FADE-OUT]
[OFF] Does not set fade-in or fade-out.
[0.5s] - [10.0s]
Sets the fade-in or fade-out time.
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] -
[4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
Note
f Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-out to cancel the fade operation.
Setting [STARTUP]
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [STARTUP].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OPEN]
The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function disabled (shutter: opened) when the
power is turned on.
[CLOSE]
The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function enabled (shutter: closed) when the
power is turned on.
Setting [SHUT-OFF]
1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [SHUT-OFF].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[LAST USED]
The projector goes into standby mode with the condition of the mechanical shutter maintained when
the projector is switched off.
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ENGLISH - 123
[OPEN]
The projector goes into standby mode with the mechanical shutter opened when the projector is
switched off.
[CLOSE]
The projector goes into standby mode with the mechanical shutter closed when the projector is
switched off.
[FREEZE]
Pause the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external device.
1) Press as to select [FREEZE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f Press the <MENU> button to release.
Note
f [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform. Check whether video output
(luminance) signal level is within the recommended range for the projector and adjust.
1) Press as to select [WAVEFORM MONITOR].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Does not display the waveform monitor.
[ON] Displays the waveform monitor.
3) Press the <MENU> button two times to clear.
4) Press as to select any horizontal line.
5) Press the <ENTER> button to switch the Select line to either luminance, red, green, or blue.
f Line selection items switch each time the <ENTER> is pressed only when the waveform monitor is
displayed.
“Select line (luminance)” Displayed in white waveform.
“Select line (red)” Displayed in red waveform.
“Select line (green)” Displayed in green waveform.
“Select line (blue)” Displayed in blue waveform.
Note
f Setting is also available with [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 140).
f Waveform monitor cannot be displayed while in [P IN P].
f The waveform monitor turns off when [P IN P] is executed during waveform monitoring.
f The waveform monitor is not displayed when on-screen display is hidden (off).
f Use [3D WAVEFORM MONITOR] to display the waveform monitor with the 3D image.
Adjusting the waveform
Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk (0 % (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) – 100 % (100 IRE)) and
adjust.
Signal level
Image displayable area
Image position
Chapter 4Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
124 - ENGLISH
1) Select “Select line (luminance)” on the waveform monitor.
2) Adjust black level.
f Use [BRIGHTNESS] in the on-screen menu [PICTURE] to adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to
the 0 % position of the waveform monitor.
3) Adjust white level.
f Use [CONTRAST] in the on-screen menu [PICTURE] to adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to
the 100 % position of the waveform monitor.
Adjusting red, green, and blue
1) Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to [USER1] or [USER2] (x page 83).
2) Select “Select line (red)” on the waveform monitor.
3) Adjust dark red areas.
f Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position
of the waveform monitor.
4) Adjust bright red areas.
f Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 %
position of the waveform monitor.
5) Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust [GREEN] and [BLUE].
Note
f For the DVI-D signal, the HDMI signal, the SDI signal, or the DIGITAL LINK signal, conrm that the setting for [SIGNAL LEVEL] is correct
before the black level adjustment.
[CUT OFF]
Each red, green, and blue color component can be removed.
1) Press as to select [CUT OFF].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF] Disables cutoff.
[ON] Enables cutoff.
Note
f When input is switched or a signal is switched, the cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 125
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
On the menu screen, select [PROJECTOR SETUP] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-
menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
[PROJECTOR ID]
The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side
to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.
1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ALL] Select this item when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.
[1] - [64] Select this item when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.
Note
f To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.
f When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specied during remote control or computer
control.
If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID
numbers.
f Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control” (x page 74) for how to set the ID number on the remote control.
[PROJECTION METHOD]
Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector.
Change the projection method if the screen display is upside down or inverted.
1) Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[FRONT/FLOOR] When installing the projector on the desk, etc., in front of the screen
[FRONT/CEILING] When installing the projector in front of the screen using the Ceiling Mount Bracket (optional)
[REAR/FLOOR] When installing the projector on the desk, etc., behind the screen (with a translucent screen)
[REAR/CEILING]
When installing the projector behind the screen (with a translucent screen) using the Ceiling Mount
Bracket (optional)
[OPERATION SETTING]
Set the operation method of the projector.
The settings are reected when “Initial setting (operation setting)” (x page 57) in the [INITIAL SETTING]
screen is already set.
If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the luminance of light source decreases by
half may shorten or the luminance may decrease.
Setting [OPERATING MODE]
1) Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL]
*1
Set this item when high luminance is required. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
126 - ENGLISH
[ECO]
*1
Set this item to increase the life of the light source though it will lower the luminance than [NORMAL].
The estimated runtime is approximately 24 000 hours.
[LONG LIFE1]
*1
Set this item to increase the life of the light source though it will lower the luminance than [ECO]. The
estimated runtime is approximately 43 000 hours.
[LONG LIFE2]
*1
Set this item to increase the life of the light source though it will lower the luminance than [LONG
LIFE1]. The estimated runtime is approximately 61 000 hours.
[LONG LIFE3]
*1
Set this item to increase the life of the light source though it will lower the luminance than [LONG
LIFE2]. The estimated runtime is approximately 87 000 hours.
[USER1]
Set [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] individually.[USER2]
[USER3]
*1 The runtime is estimated when the [PICTURE] menu [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3].
5) Press as to select [APPLY].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
7) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The [OPERATING MODE] setting will not return to the factory default even when [ALL USER DATA] is executed from the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu [INITIALIZE] (x page 144).
f Set [OPERATING MODE] to anything other than [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or [LONG LIFE3] when using the projector at an
altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
f If the runtime exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
Setting [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]
Adjust the maximum level to correct screen brightness according to the changes in brightness of the light source.
1) Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
4) Press qw to adjust.
Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press w.
Increases the maximum level of brightness correction.
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Press q.
Decreases the maximum level of brightness correction.
5) Press as to select [APPLY].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
7) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL], [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or [LONG LIFE3], the item of [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT
LEVEL] cannot be adjusted.
f When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] [CONSTANT MODE] is
set to [AUTO] or [PC], the brightness is corrected using this setting.
f The [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] setting will not return to the factory default even when [ALL USER DATA] is executed from the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [INITIALIZE] (x page 144).
Setting [LIGHT OUTPUT]
Adjust the brightness of light source.
The [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [LIGHT OUTPUT]. The
most recent setting is reected in both items.
1) Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 127
3) Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
4) Press qw to adjust.
Operation
Adjustment
Range of adjustment
Brightness Runtime (estimate)
Press w.
The screen becomes brighter. The runtime becomes shorter.
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Press q.
The screen becomes darker. The runtime becomes longer.
5) Press as to select [APPLY].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
7) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be adjusted individually for each setting item of [OPERATING MODE].
f In such a case when conguring multiple screens with multiple projectors, uniformity of brightness between multiple screens can be
obtained by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT].
Interrelation of luminance and runtime
You can use the projector with desired brightness and duration of use by combining the settings of [MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL], [LIGHT OUTPUT], and [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].
Interrelation of luminance and runtime is as follows. Make the settings depending on your desired duration of use
and brightness of the projected image.
Values of the luminance and runtime are rough estimations.
r To set the projector based on the duration of use
Duration of use
(hour)
When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF] When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]
[MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL]
(%)
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
(%)
Luminance (lm)
[MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL]
(%)
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
(%)
Luminance (lm)
20 000 100.0 100.0 12 000 100.0 58.0 7 000
24 000 100.0 83.0 10 000 100.0 54.0 6 500
27 000 100.0 65.0 7 800 100.0 51.0 6 100
31 000 100.0 100.0 47.0 5 600
35 000 100.0 100.0 44.0 5 300
40 000 100.0 100.0 41.0 4 900
r To set the projector based on luminance
Luminance (lm)
When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF] When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]
[MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL]
(%)
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
(%)
Runtime (hour)
[MAX LIGHT
OUTPUT LEVEL]
(%)
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
(%)
Runtime (hour)
12 000 100.0 100.0 20 000
11 000 100.0 92.0 23 000 100.0 92.0 1 500
10 000 100.0 83.0 24 000 100.0 83.0 4 500
9 000 100.0 75.0 25 500 100.0 75.0 8 500
8 000 100.0 67.0 26 500 100.0 67.0 14 000
7 000 100.0 58.0 28 000 100.0 58.0 20 000
6 000 100.0 50.0 29 500 100.0 50.0 28 000
5 000 100.0 100.0 42.0 38 500
4 000 100.0 100.0 33.0 52 500
Note
f Under inuence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation environment, etc., the runtime may be shorter than the
estimation.
f The duration of use is referred to as the runtime when you use the projector successively. The duration of use is an estimated duration and
is not the warranty period.
f If the runtime exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
128 - ENGLISH
Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]
Set the operation of the brightness control function.
The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]. The most recent setting is reected in both
items.
1) Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [CONSTANT MODE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Does not correct the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
[AUTO]
Corrects the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
When the brightness of light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the screen is
automatically corrected.
[PC]
Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring
& Control Software”
*1
.
*1 “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.
f When [PC] is selected, proceed to Step 7).
5) Press as to select [LINK].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Performs correction by the brightness sensor on one projector without synchronizing with the other
projectors.
The duration that the constant brightness is kept will become longer by setting the value of [LIGHT
OUTPUT] smaller.
[GROUP A]
[GROUP B]
[GROUP C]
[GROUP D]
Performs correction by the brightness sensor in multiple projectors in synchronization.
Up to four groups (A to D) can be set within the same subnet by using the network function.
You can register and synchronize up to eight projectors in one group.
7) Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].
8) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
9) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) button to set a time.
f Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows
setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59.
f When the time is not specied, select [OFF] between 23 and 00 of the hour, or between 59 and 00 of the
minute.
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f [CALIBRATION TIME] is set.
f Brightness and color are measured at the specied time. The dynamic contrast function does not operate
during measurement.
11) Press as to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].
12) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Displays the message during calibration.
[OFF] Does not display the message during calibration.
13) Press as to select [APPLY].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 129
14) Press the <ENTER> button.
f When [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to anything other than [OFF], the
brightness and white balance of light source at the time when the <ENTER> button is pressed is recorded
as the standard brightness and white balance.
f If the <ENTER> button is pressed when [LINK] is set from [GROUP A] to [GROUP D], the group name is
displayed on the screens of projectors that have been set in the same group.
LINK GROUP A
15) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f When [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], keep the shutter function disabled (shutter:
open) for at least two minutes to perform the brightness sensor calibration after the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] setting has been
completed.
f If the shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed) within approximately 10 minutes after the light source has turned on while [CONSTANT
MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], brightness and color cannot be measured. Therefore, brightness
may be corrected approximately two minutes after the shutter function is disabled (shutter: open).
f Since the brightness and the color of the light source do not stabilize for approximately eight minutes after turning on the light source when
[CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], the brightness and the color of the light source will
automatically measured approximately eight minutes after the light source is turned on. A correction is made based on this measurement
result so that the brightness and the color will be the same as the standard brightness and the color when adjusted with the brightness
control.
f When the projector operates with [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to [AUTO] or [PC], the items of
[OPERATING MODE] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] cannot be changed.
f When [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO], and [LINK] is set to [OFF], the brightness will be
corrected until it reaches the value set in [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
f The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation
environment of the projector.
f When the variation in brightness has increased due to aging of the light source, or when you replaced the light source, readjust the
brightness control.
f When the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, set the [CALIBRATION TIME] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]. If it is
not set, correction will not be performed automatically.
f The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not
operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
f The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting will be reected when you enter the time.
f The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting will be reected when the item is changed using qw.
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
Adjust the brightness of light source.
The setting is reected when it is already set with “Initial setting (operation setting)” (x page 57) in the [INITIAL
SETTING] screen, or the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING]. The [LIGHT OUTPUT]
setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING] [LIGHT OUTPUT].
The most recent setting is reected in both items.
1) Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
2) Press qw to adjust.
Operation
Adjustment
Range of adjustment
Brightness Runtime (estimate)
Press w.
The screen becomes brighter. The runtime becomes shorter.
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Press q.
The screen becomes darker. The runtime becomes longer.
Note
f [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be adjusted individually for each setting item of [OPERATING MODE].
f In such a case when conguring multiple screens with multiple projectors, uniformity of brightness between multiple screens can be
obtained by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
130 - ENGLISH
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]
The projector is equipped with a brightness sensor to measure brightness and color of the light source, and
corrects brightness and white balance of the projected image according to the changes in brightness and color of
the light source.
By using this function, in such a condition that multiple screens are congured using multiple projectors, you can
reduce changes in overall brightness and white balance of the multiple screens due to light source degradation
and suppress variation in brightness and white balance to preserve uniformity.
Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]
Set the operation of the brightness control function.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [CONSTANT MODE].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Does not correct the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
[AUTO]
Corrects the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.
When the brightness of light source or white balance changes, the brightness of the projected image
is automatically corrected.
[PC]
Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring
& Control Software”
*1
.
*1 “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.
f When [PC] is selected, proceed to Step 9).
7) Press as to select [LINK].
8) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Performs corrections by the brightness sensor on a single projector without synchronizing with the
other projectors.
The duration that the constant brightness is kept will become longer by setting the value of [LIGHT
OUTPUT] smaller.
[GROUP A]
[GROUP B]
[GROUP C]
[GROUP D]
Performs correction by the brightness sensor in multiple projectors in synchronization.
Up to four groups (A to D) can be set within the same subnet by using the network function.
You can register and synchronize up to eight projectors in one group.
9) Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
11) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a
time.
f Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows
setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59.
f When the time is not specied, select [OFF] between 23 and 00 of the hour, or between 59 and 00 of the
minute.
12) Press the <ENTER> button.
f [CALIBRATION TIME] is set.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 131
f Brightness and color are measured at the specied time. The dynamic contrast function does not operate
during measurement.
13) Press as to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].
14) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON] Displays messages during calibration.
[OFF] Does not display messages during calibration.
15) Press as to select [APPLY].
16) Press the <ENTER> button.
f When [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to anything other than [OFF], the
brightness and white balance of light source at the time when the <ENTER> button is pressed is recorded
as the standard brightness and white balance.
f If the <ENTER> button is pressed when [LINK] is set from [GROUP A] to [GROUP D], the group name is
displayed on the screens of projectors that have been set in the same group.
LINK GROUP A
Note
f When [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], keep the shutter function disabled (shutter:
open) for at least two minutes to perform the brightness sensor calibration after the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] setting has been
completed.
f If the shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed) within approximately 10 minutes after the light source has turned on while [CONSTANT
MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], brightness and color cannot be measured. Therefore, brightness
may be corrected approximately two minutes after the shutter function is disabled (shutter: open).
f Since the brightness and the color of the light source do not stabilize for approximately eight minutes after turning on the light source while
[CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], the brightness and the color of the light source will be
automatically measured approximately eight minutes after the light source is turned on. A correction is made based on this measurement
result so that the brightness and the color will be the same as the standard brightness and the color when adjusted with the brightness
control.
f When [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO], and [LINK] is set to [OFF], the brightness will be
corrected until it reaches the value set in [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
f The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation
environment of the projector.
f When the variation in brightness has increased due to aging of the light source, or when you replaced the light source, readjust the
brightness control.
f When the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, set the [CALIBRATION TIME] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]. If it is
not set, correction will not be performed automatically.
f The brightness control function and the dynamic contrast function will operate simultaneously, but the dynamic contrast function will not
operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
f The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting will be reected when you enter the time.
f The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting will be reected at the time when the item is switched using qw.
Displaying [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]
Display the brightness control status.
1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
132 - ENGLISH
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen display example
When [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [OFF]
The screen shows the status that the brightness control is disabled.
1
RETURN
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
CONSTANT MODE
PROJECTOR
OFF
MENU
When [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] and [LINK] is set to [OFF]
The screen shows the status of the brightness control in one projector.
5
1
6
RETURN
LINK
PROJECTOR
OFF
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
MENU
When [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] and [LINK] is set from
[GROUP A] to [GROUP D]
The screen shows the status of the brightness control of synchronized projectors (up to eight units), including the
projector being controlled through the on-screen menu.
2
1
3
4
5
7
8
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
192. 168. 30. 2
192. 168. 30. 3
192. 168. 30. 4
LINK
UPDATE
PROJECTOR
GROUP A
PROJECTOR2
PROJECTOR3
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
MENU SELECT
When [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [PC]
5
1
6
RETURN
CONSTANT MODE
PROJECTOR
PC
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS
MENU
1 Display the name of the projector.
2 Display the synchronized group.
3 Display the IP address of the projector.
4 Display the names and IP addresses of projectors in same group detected over the network.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 133
5 Display the status by color.
Green: There is an allowance for brightness correction.
Yellow: There is little allowance for brightness correction.
Red: There is a brightness control error.
6 Display error detailed messages.
7 Display error messages.
When the message [Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL to some projectors.] appears, it means that synchronization with the
projector displayed in red has failed.
Press as to select the projector displayed in red, and press the <ENTER> button to display the error details.
8 Update to the latest status information.
r Error details
Error message Measures to take
[Exceed maximum number of
projectors.]
f Limit the number of projectors in one group to eight.
f To synchronize nine or more projectors, use a PC and the dedicated software “Multi Monitoring &
Control Software”
*1
.
[Please check the COMMAND
CONTROL setting.]
f Set [NETWORK CONTROL] [COMMAND CONTROL] to [ON] for the projector in error.
f Set [NETWORK CONTROL] [COMMAND PORT] of all projectors to be linked to the same value.
[Please check the USER NAME
and PASSWORD in the COMMAND
CONTROL setting.]
f Assign the same [User name] and [Password] strings that have web control administrator rights to
all projectors to be linked.
[Cannot apply BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL. Please check projector
status.]
f The projector is in standby. Switch on the power.
[Brightness Sensor Error]
f There is a problem with the brightness sensor. If problems persist even after switching on the
power, consult your dealer.
*1 “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.
Note
f If the synchronized projectors are not displayed in the list, check the following:
g Are there devices with the same IP address on the network?
g Are the LAN cables connected correctly? (x page 160)
g Are the subnets of the projectors the same?
g Are the same [LINK] settings applied to a group?
f Refer to [NETWORK SETUP] (x page 157) or “[Network cong] page” (x page 170) on how to change the projector name.
Brightness control adjustment procedure example
The steps exemplify an adjustment to link the brightness of eight projectors connected in a network.
1) Connect all projectors to the hub using LAN cables. (x page 160)
2) Switch on all projectors and start projection.
3) Set [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [OFF], and select [APPLY], and then
press the <ENTER> button.
4) Set [OPERATING MODE] of each projector to the same setting. (x page 125)
5) Set [SUBNET MASK] and [IP ADDRESS] in each projector.
f To be able to communicate over the network, set the same value in [SUBNET MASK] for all projectors and
set a different value in [IP ADDRESS] for each projector.
6) Wait for at least eight minutes after projection has started until the light source brightness becomes
steady.
7) Set all items in the [PICTURE] menu of all projectors to the same values.
8) Adjust [COLOR MATCHING] to match colors.
9) Display the internal test pattern “All white” in all projectors.
10) Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] of all projectors to 100 % or the maximum value that can be set.
f Depending on the [OPERATING MODE] settings, [LIGHT OUTPUT] may not be able to be set to 100 %.
11) Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] of the projector with the least brightness to 90 % or 10 % lower than the
maximum value that can be set.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
134 - ENGLISH
12) Adjust [LIGHT OUTPUT] of each projector.
f Adjust [LIGHT OUTPUT] of all the other projectors so that the brightness will be the same as the projector
with the least brightness.
13) Set [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [AUTO], and [LINK] to [GROUP A] in
all projectors.
14) Select [APPLY] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] and press the <ENTER> button in all projectors.
f Brightness control starts.
Note
f Brightness is automatically corrected whenever the light source lights up by switching on/off the projector, etc.
f When the variation in brightness has increased due to aging of the light source, or when you replaced the light source, readjust the
brightness control.
[STANDBY MODE]
Set the power consumption during the standby.
1) Press as to select [STANDBY MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL] Select this item to use the network function during standby.
[ECO] Select this item to reduce power consumption during standby.
Note
f The AC voltage monitor function, the network function, the <SERIAL OUT> terminal, and part of the RS-232C command cannot be used
during the standby when set to [ECO].
When an error or warning occurs on the projector, the self-diagnosis display appears on the control panel regardless of the [STANDBY
MODE] settings. (x page 189)
f When [ECO] is set, it may take approximately 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on,
compared with when [NORMAL] is set.
f When [NORMAL] is set, the network function and the <SERIAL OUT> terminal can be used during standby.
f The [STANDBY MODE] setting will not reset to the factory default even if [ALL USER DATA] is executed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu [INITIALIZE].
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
A function that automatically switches the power source of the projector to standby if there is no input signal for a
certain period of time. The time before switching to standby can be set.
1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE] Disables the No signal shut-off function.
[10MIN.] - [90MIN.] Sets the time in increments of 10 minutes.
[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]
This is a function to automatically turn off the light source of the projector when there is no input signal for specic
period. The time until the light source is turned off can be set.
1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE] Disables the no signal lights-out function.
[10SEC.] - [5MIN.]
Turns off the light source when there is no input signal for the preset period.
Select [10SEC.], [20SEC.], [30SEC.], [1MIN.], [2MIN.], [3MIN.], or [5MIN.].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 135
Note
f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink slowly in green while the no signal lights-out function is operating and the light source
is turned off.
f When [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on
again from the condition that the light source has turned off by this function.
g When the signal is input
g When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
g When the power on <b> button is pressed
g When the operation to disable the shutter function (shutter: open) is performed, such as pressing the <SHUTTER> button
g When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up
[INITIAL STARTUP]
Set the startup method when the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON>.
1) Press as to select [INITIAL STARTUP].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[LAST MEMORY] Starts up the projector in the condition before the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <OFF>.
[STANDBY] Starts up the projector in standby.
[ON] Starts projecting immediately.
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection.
1) Press as to select [STARTUP INPUT SELECT].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select the input, and press the <ENTER> button.
[LAST USED] Keeps the input selected last.
[RGB1] Sets the input to RGB1.
[RGB2] Sets the input to RGB2.
[DVI-D] Sets the input to DVI-D.
[HDMI] Sets the input to HDMI.
[DIGITAL LINK] Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[SDI1] Sets the input to SDI1.
[SDI2] Sets the input to SDI2.
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]
*1
Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the Panasonic twisted-pair-cable
transmitter to the specied input.
*1 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the projector, its input
name is automatically reected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.
Note
f If [BACKUP INPUT MODE] in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] (x page 110) is set to [1], and the power is
turned off with the input set to HDMI in the previous use, the projection will start with DVI-D input even when [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] is
set to [LAST USED].
f When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [2] using the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] (x page 110), and the
power is turned off with the input set to SDI2 in the pervious use, projection will start with the SDI1 input even if [STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
is set to [LAST USED].
[DATE AND TIME]
Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock of the projector.
Setting the time zone
1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
136 - ENGLISH
3) Press as to select [TIME ZONE].
4) Press qw to switch [TIME ZONE].
Setting the date and time manually
1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select an item, and press qw to set the local date and time.
6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The setting of the date and time will be completed.
Setting the date and time automatically
1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], and press qw to change the setting to [ON].
6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The setting of the date and time will be completed.
Note
f To set the date and time automatically, the projector must be connected to the network.
f If synchronization with the NTP server fails just after [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON], [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to
[OFF]. If [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON] while the NTP server is not set, [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to [OFF].
f Access the projector via a web browser to set the NTP server. Refer to “[Adjust clock] page” (x page 171) for details.
f The [TIME ZONE] setting is reset to the factory default when [ALL USER DATA] is executed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[INITIALIZE] (x page 144). However, the date and time based on the local date and time setting (Coordinated Universal Time, UTC,
Universal Time, Coordinated) will be maintained without being initialized.
[SCHEDULE]
Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week.
Enabling/disabling the schedule function
1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the schedule function.
[ON]
Enables the schedule function. Refer to “How to assign a program” (x page 137) or “How to set a
program” (x page 137) for how to set the schedule.
Note
f When [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON], the [STANDBY MODE] setting is forcibly switched to [NORMAL], and the setting cannot be changed.
Even if [SCHEDULE] is then set to [OFF] when in this state, the setting of [STANDBY MODE] remains at [NORMAL].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 137
How to assign a program
1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3) Select and assign a program to each day of week.
f Press as to select the day of week, and press qw to select a program number.
f You can set the program from No.1 to No.7. “- - -” indicates that the program number has not been set.
How to set a program
Set up to 16 commands to each program.
1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [PROGRAM EDIT].
4) Press qw to select a program number, and press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press as to select a command number, and press the <ENTER> button.
f You can change the page using qw.
6) Press asqw to select [TIME], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
7) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a
time, and then press the <ENTER> button.
8) Press asqw to select [COMMAND].
9) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [COMMAND] detailed screen is displayed.
10) Press as to select a [COMMAND].
f For [COMMAND] which requires detailed settings, the items of the detailed settings will switch each time
you press qw.
f When [INPUT] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press asqw to select the input to be
set.
[COMMAND]
Detailed settings of
[COMMAND]
Description
[POWER ON] Switches on the projector.
[STANDBY] Enters standby.
[SHUTTER]
[OPEN] Disables the shutter function (shutter: open).
[CLOSE] Enables the shutter function (shutter: closed).
[INPUT]
[RGB1] Switches the input to RGB1.
[RGB2] Switches the input to RGB2.
[DVI-D] Switches the input to DVI-D.
[HDMI] Switches the input to HDMI.
[DIGITAL LINK] Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[SDI1] Switches the input to SDI1.
[SDI2] Switches the input to SDI2.
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]
*1
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the
Panasonic twisted-pair-cable transmitter to the specied input.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
138 - ENGLISH
[COMMAND]
Detailed settings of
[COMMAND]
Description
[OPERATING MODE]
*2
[NORMAL] Prioritizes luminance.
[ECO]
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source with higher
luminance.
[LONG LIFE1]
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source although
the luminance is lower than that of [ECO].
[LONG LIFE2]
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source although
the luminance is even lower than that of [LONG LIFE1].
[LONG LIFE3]
Controls the power to increase the life of the light source to the
maximum although the luminance is even lower than that of [LONG
LIFE2].
[USER1] Controls the power with the setting set to [USER1].
[USER2] Controls the power with the setting set to [USER2].
[USER3] Controls the power with the setting set to [USER3].
[P IN P]
[OFF] P IN P function is not used.
[USER1] Lays out the sub-screen with the settings of [USER1].
[USER2] Lays out the sub-screen with the settings of [USER2].
[USER3] Lays out the sub-screen with the settings of [USER3].
*1 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to the projector, its input
name is automatically reected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.
*2 If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the light source luminance decreases by half may shorten or the
luminance may decrease.
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The command is xed and n is displayed at the left of the selected command.
f After the command is xed, press the <MENU> button to close the detailed setting screen.
12) Press asqw to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f To delete a command that has been already set, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the screen in Step 5) is
displayed, or select [DELETE] at the screen in Step 6) and press the <ENTER> button.
f If multiple commands have been set for the same time, they are executed in chronological order starting from the smallest command
number.
f The operating time will be the local time. (x page 135)
f If an operation is executed with the remote control or control panel of the projector or with a control command before the command set in
[SCHEDULE] is executed, the command set with the schedule function may not be executed.
[RS-232C]
Set the communication conditions of the <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal. Refer to “<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL
OUT> terminal” (x page 199).
Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL IN> terminal
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [INPUT SELECT].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[PROJECTOR] Performs the RS-232C communication with the <SERIAL IN> terminal of the projector.
[DIGITAL LINK]
Performs the RS-232C communication via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model
No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) and the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
5) Press as to select [(IN) BAUDRATE].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 139
[9600]
Select the proper speed.[19200]
[38400]
7) Press as to select [(IN) PARITY].
8) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NONE]
Select the parity condition.[EVEN]
[ODD]
Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL OUT> terminal
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [(OUT) BAUDRATE].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[9600]
Select the proper speed.[19200]
[38400]
5) Press as to select [(OUT) PARITY].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NONE]
Select the parity condition.[EVEN]
[ODD]
Setting the response
1) Press as to select [RS-232C].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID ALL)].
4) Press qw to switch the item.
[ON] Returns the response when an ID is designated as ALL.
[OFF] Does not return the response when an ID is designated as ALL.
5) Press as to select [GROUP].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
[A] - [Z]
Controls multiple projectors simultaneously by sending the ID of RS-232C. You can set groups from
[A] to [Z]. The projector responds when the ID of RS-232C matches the setting.
7) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)].
8) Press qw to switch the item.
[ON] Returns the response when an ID is designated as GROUP.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
140 - ENGLISH
[OFF] Does not return the response when an ID is designated as GROUP.
Note
f When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication using that serial terminal is available only when the corresponding device
(such as the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G)) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK/
LAN> terminal.
f When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G), setting for “NO
SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.
f When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication speed for input is xed to 9 600 bps and the parity is xed to “NONE”.
[REMOTE2 MODE]
You can set the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
1) Press as to select [REMOTE2 MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
Uses pin assignment of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal in standard setting. (x page 203)
[USER] Changes the setting of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
f When [USER] is selected, proceed to Step 3).
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
4) Press as to select one from [PIN2] to [PIN8], and press qw to switch the setting.
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
Set the function of the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.
1) Press as to select [FUNCTION BUTTON].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a function.
[DISABLE] Disables the <FUNCTION> button.
[P IN P]
Switches the [P IN P] setting ([OFF], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3]). (x page 146)
[SUB MEMORY]
Displays the sub memory list. (x page 151)
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
Switches the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] setting. (x page 88)
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
Switches the [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] setting. (x page 86)
[FREEZE]
Temporarily pauses the image. (x page 123)
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Displays the waveform of the input signal. (x page 123)
[LENS MEMORY LOAD]
Loads the registered lens memory. (x page 141)
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
Switches the [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] setting. (x page 103)
[PROJECTION METHOD]
Switches the [PROJECTION METHOD] setting. (x page 125)
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
[LENS CALIBRATION]
Detect the lens shift limit value of the projector and set the home position and the ET-D75LE90 lens standard
position automatically.
1) Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL]
Select this item when anything other than the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is used.
Move the lens to the home position after completing the calibration.
[D75LE90]
Select this item when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is used.
Move the lens to the ET-D75LE90 lens standard position after completing the calibration.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 141
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
4) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f To cancel, select [CANCEL].
f The lens moves up, down, left, and right to detect the lens shift limit value, and automatically set the home
position and the ET-D75LE90 lens standard position.
f The lens stops to complete the calibration.
Note
f [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu during lens calibration. The operation cannot be canceled during calibration.
f When lens calibration executes correctly, [COMPLETE] is displayed and [INCOMPLETE] is displayed when it does not execute correctly.
f Pressing the <FOCUS> button on the remote control for at least three seconds will also display the conrmation screen for lens calibration
execution.
[LENS MEMORY]
Save and load the focus position, shift position, and zoom position of an adjusted lens.
Saving lens position
1) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY SAVE].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select the item to save, and press the <ENTER> button.
6) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.
7) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
8) After the name is input, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The registration completes and returns to the [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.
f If you press asqw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the lens memory will not be
saved.
f If you press asqw to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the entered name will not be
registered and the default name will be used.
f If you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be
used.
Loading the lens position
1) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY LOAD].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [LENS MEMORY LOAD] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select the item to load, and press the <ENTER> button.
6) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The lens moves automatically to the registered shift, zoom, and focus positions.
Note
f Lens memory is not guaranteed to be 100 % reproduced.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
142 - ENGLISH
f The zoom and focus positions may have shifted after lens memory was loaded. Readjust as necessary.
Beware of shift, as errors in zoom position are particularly signicant.
f When a lens is replaced, readjust and save the lens memory again.
f If a lens without zoom function is used, the lens memory of the zoom position does not operate.
f When [LENS MEMORY LOAD] is assigned to the <FUNCTION> button, the registered lens memory is loaded in order each time you press
the <FUNCTION> button.
Deleting a lens memory
1) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY DELETE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [LENS MEMORY DELETE] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select the item to delete, and press the <ENTER> button.
8) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Changing the lens memory name
1) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
7) Press as to select the name to change, and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.
8) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
9) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The registration completes and returns to the [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen.
f If you press asqw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not
be registered.
f If you press asqw to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not be
registered and the default name will be used.
f If you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be
used.
[STATUS]
Display the status of the projector.
1) Press as to select [STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [STATUS] screen is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 143
3) Press qw to switch the pages.
f The page will change each time you press the button.
[PROJECTOR TYPE] Displays the projector type and serial number of the projector.
[PROJECTOR RUNTIME] Displays the runtime of the projector.
[LIGHT RUNTIME] Displays the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2.
[MAIN/SUB VERSION] Displays the main and sub versions of the rmware of the projector.
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]
*1
Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.]
*1
Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]
*1
Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the projector.
[AROUND LIGHT1 TEMP.]
*1
Displays the status of the temperature around light source 1 of the projector.
[AROUND LIGHT2 TEMP.]
*1
Displays the status of the temperature around light source 2 of the projector.
[COOLING CONDITION] Displays the set cooling conditions. Automatically recognized result is displayed when set to [AUTO].
[ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE] Displays the atmospheric pressure.
[SELF TEST] Displays the status of the projector.
[INPUT] Displays the input terminal currently selected.
[BACKUP INPUT STATUS]
Displays whether switching to the backup input signal is possible or not when [BACKUP INPUT
MODE] is set to [OFF]. (x page 110)
[SIGNAL NAME] Displays the input signal name.
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY] Displays the frequency of the input signal.
[NUMBER OF REGISTERED
SIGNAL]
Displays the number of registered signals.
[REMOTE2 STATUS] Displays the control status of the REMOTE2.
[AC VOLTAGE] Displays the input supply voltage.
[UPGRADE]
[ET-UK20]
Displays the activation status by the Upgrade Kit (Model No.:
ET-UK20).
[ET-CUK10]
Displays the activation status by the Auto Screen Adjustment
Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-CUK10).
[ON COUNT]
[POWER ON TIMES] Displays the number of times the power is turned on.
[SHUTTER]
Displays the number of times the mechanical shutter is closed.
It is counted when [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is set to [ENABLE].
[SIGNAL INFORMATION]
[MEMORY NO.] Displays the memory number of the input signal.
[INPUT] Displays the input terminal currently selected.
[SIGNAL NAME] Displays the input signal name.
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY] Displays the frequency of the input signal.
[SYNC.STATE] Displays the synch polarity of the input signal.
[V.SYNC WIDTH] Displays the vertical sync signal pulse width of the input signal.
[SCAN TYPE] Displays the scan type of the input signal.
[TOTAL DOTS] Displays the total dot count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY DOTS] Displays the number of input signal display dots.
[TOTAL LINES] Displays the total line count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY LINES] Displays the number of input signal display lines.
[SAMPLING] Displays the sampling information of the input signal.
[SIGNAL LEVEL] Displays the signal level of the input signal.
[BIT DEPTH] Displays the gradation of the input signal.
*1 The temperature status is indicated with text color (green/yellow/red) and bar scale. Use the projector within the range that the indication is
green.
Note
f Press the <ENTER> button while displaying the [STATUS] screen to send an E-mail including the content of status to the E-mail addresses
(up to two addresses) set in “[E-mail set up] page” (x page 172).
f Some items in [SIGNAL INFORMATION] may be displayed and others not displayed, depending on the signal being input.
f If any abnormality has occurred on the projector, press the <DEFAULT> button while the [STATUS] screen is displayed to display the detail
screen of the error information.
f For details on the contents displayed in [SELF TEST], refer to “Self-diagnosis display” (x page 189).
[AC VOLTAGE MONITOR]
Enable or disable the AC voltage monitor function. The value of input supply voltage is displayed on the self-
diagnosis display at the side of the projector when enabled.
1) Press as to select [AC VOLTAGE MONITOR].
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
144 - ENGLISH
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the AC voltage monitor function.
[ON] Enables the AC voltage monitor function.
Note
f When [ON] is set, the value of the input supply voltage is always displayed in the self-diagnosis display while the main power of the projector
is turned on.
f Even when [OFF] is set, the value of input supply voltage can be displayed temporarily in the self-diagnosis display by operating the button
on the remote control. (x page 74)
f The value of input supply voltage cannot be displayed in the self-diagnosis display during standby when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[STANDBY MODE] (x page 134) is set to [ECO].
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
Save the various setting values as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press as to select [SAVE ALL USER DATA].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
4) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f [PROGRESS] is displayed while saving data.
Note
f Data set from the computer application is not included in [ALL USER DATA].
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
Load the various setting values saved as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1) Press as to select [LOAD ALL USER DATA].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
4) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The projector enters the standby mode to reect the setting values when [LOAD ALL USER DATA] is executed.
f Data registered from a computer is not included in [ALL USER DATA].
[INITIALIZE]
Return various setting values to their factory default settings.
1) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
f The [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select an item to initialize.
[ALL USER DATA]
Returns all setting values including [REGISTERED SIGNAL], [NETWORK SETUP], [E-mail set up],
and [USER LOGO] to the factory default settings.
The projector enters the standby mode to reect the setting values.
[REGISTERED SIGNAL]
Deletes all the setting values saved for each input signal.
To delete only a part of a registered signal, perform the procedure described in “Deleting the
registered signal” (x page 149).
Chapter 4Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ENGLISH - 145
[NETWORK/E-MAIL] Returns [NETWORK SETUP] and [E-mail set up] to factory default settings.
[LOGO IMAGE] Deletes the image registered in [USER LOGO].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
6) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f Even when [ALL USER DATA] is executed, the settings of [UNIFORMITY], [OPERATING MODE], [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL], and
[STANDBY MODE] are not initialized.
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
This function is used by a service person.
Chapter 4Settings — [P IN P] menu
146 - ENGLISH
[P IN P] menu
On the menu screen, select [P IN P] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
Using P IN P function
Locate a separate, small sub screen in the main screen to project two images simultaneously.
1) Press as to select [P IN P MODE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a function.
[OFF] P IN P function is not used.
[USER1]
The items set in “Setting P IN P function” (x page 146) are used in P IN P function.
[USER2]
[USER3]
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
Setting P IN P function
P IN P function settings can be saved to [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3].
1) Press as to select [P IN P MODE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select the desired mode from [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3], and press the <ENTER>
button.
4) Press as to select [MAIN WINDOW] or [SUB WINDOW], and press the <ENTER> button.
5) Press as to select the input terminal to be displayed in the window, and press the <ENTER> button.
6) Press asto select an item.
[SIZE] Set the window display size between 10 % and 100 %.
[POSITION] Set the display position of the window within the screen.
[CLOCK PHASE]
When the sub window is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal and a
ickering image or smeared outline appears, set between 0 and +31.
7) If [SIZE] is selected in Step 6), press the <ENTER> button.
f The sub-menu is displayed.
8) Press asto select an item.
9) Press qw to make adjustment, and press the <MENU> button.
10) If [POSITION] is selected in Step 6), press the <ENTER> button.
11) Press asqw to adjust the position, and press the <MENU> button.
12) If [CLOCK PHASE] is selected in Step 6), press qw to make adjustment.
13) Press as to select [FRAME LOCK].
14) Press qw to switch the item.
[MAIN WINDOW] Set frame lock to the input signal set in the main window.
[SUB WINDOW] Set frame lock to the input signal set in the sub window.
15) Press as to select [TYPE].
Chapter 4Settings — [P IN P] menu
ENGLISH - 147
16) Press qw to switch the item.
[MAIN WINDOW] The main window has display priority.
[SUB WINDOW] The sub window has display priority.
Note
f The P IN P function may not be available for some signals being input or terminals being selected. Refer to “Two-window display
combination list” (x page 204) for details.
f Images in combination of DIGITAL LINK and other inputs cannot be displayed in P IN P.
f The main window setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as [PICTURE MODE], [GAMMA], and [COLOR
TEMPERATURE].
f While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw to switch the sizes and positions of the main window and sub window
while P IN P is operating.
f [P IN P] cannot be set when [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to other than [NORMAL].
f [P IN P] cannot be set when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to other than [OFF].
f [P IN P] cannot be set when [IMAGE ROTATION] is set to other than [OFF].
f 3D images cannot be displayed while in P IN P.
f [P IN P] cannot be set when [SIMUL INPUT SETTING] is set to other than [OFF].
Chapter 4Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu
148 - ENGLISH
[TEST PATTERN] menu
On the menu screen, select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
[TEST PATTERN]
Display the test pattern built-in to the projector.
Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input
signal before performing various adjustments.
1) Press qw to switch the [TEST PATTERN] item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
Menu screen + All white
Displays test patterns with the menu screen. Select a test pattern so that it is easy to make various
adjustments.
Menu screen + All black
Menu screen + Window
Menu screen + Window
(inversion)
Menu screen + Color bar
(vertical)
Menu screen + Color bar
(horizontal)
Menu screen + 16:9/4:3
aspect frame
Menu screen + Focus
Menu screen + Input screen
Displays the menu screen and input signal.
Built-in test patterns are not displayed.
Note
f Press the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed to hide the menu screen.
Changing color or a focus test pattern
The color can be changed when the “Menu screen + Focus” test pattern is displayed.
1) Press qw to select the “Menu screen + Focus” test pattern.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select a color, and press the <ENTER> button.
f The color of the focus test pattern will be changed to the selected color.
Note
f The test pattern color settings return to [WHITE] when the projector is switched off.
f Colors of the test patterns other than focus test patterns cannot be changed.
Chapter 4Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
ENGLISH - 149
[SIGNAL LIST] menu
On the menu screen, select [SIGNAL LIST] from the main menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
r Registered signal details
A1 (1-2)
When the address number (A1, A2, ... L7, L8) signal is registered
Sub memory number
Memory number:
f A name can be set for each sub memory (x page 151).
Registering new signals
After a new signal is input and the <MENU> button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed, the
registration is completed and the [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
f A 3D icon is displayed at the right of the [SIGNAL LIST] screen when a signal is registered as 3D signal.
RGB2
RGB2
RGB2
A3: XGA75-A3
A1: 720/60p-A1
A2: 1280x1024/60-A2
Note
f Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be registered to the projector.
f There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through L, with eight memories possible on each page) for memory numbers, and the signal is
registered to the lowest number that is available. If there is no available memory number it will be overwritten from the oldest signal.
f The name to be registered is automatically determined by the input signal.
f If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input.
Renaming the registered signal
Registered signals can be renamed.
1) Press asqw to select the signal of which name is to be changed.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
f The memory number, input terminal, input signal name, frequency, synch polarity, etc., are displayed.
f Press the <MENU> button to return to the [SIGNAL LIST] screen.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE].
5) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
6) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
7) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The registration is completed and the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen returns.
f When pressing asqw to select [CANCEL] and pressing the <ENTER> button, the changed signal name
will not be registered and an automatically registered signal name will be used.
Deleting the registered signal
Registered signals can be deleted.
1) Press asqw to select the signal to delete.
2) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
Chapter 4Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
150 - ENGLISH
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The selected signal will be deleted.
Note
f A registered signal can also be deleted from [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] on the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen.
Protecting the registered signal
1) Press asqw to select the signal to protect.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [LOCK].
5) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] The signal is not protected.
[ON] The signal is protected.
f A lock icon is displayed at the right of the [SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK] is set to [ON].
RGB2
RGB2
RGB2
A3: XGA75-A3
A1: 720/60p-A1
A2: 1280x1024/60-A2
Note
f When [LOCK] is set to [ON], signal deletion, image adjustment, and automatic setup are not available. To perform these operations, set
[LOCK] to [OFF].
f A signal can be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected.
f Even a protected signal will be deleted if [INITIALIZE] is executed.
Expanding signal lock-in range
1) Press asqw to select the signal to set.
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].
5) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[NARROW] Select in most cases.
[WIDE] Widens the lock-in range.
f An expansion icon is displayed at the right of the [SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK-IN RANGE] is set to
[WIDE].
RGB2
RGB2
RGB2
A3: XGA75-A3
A1: 720/60p-A1
A2: 1280x1024/60-A2
Note
f Switch the range where the signal to be input is determined to be the same signal as the already registered signal.
f To prioritize the determination that a signal is the same as the already registered signal, set this function to [WIDE].
f Use in cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.
f This function can be used only when a signal is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal, the <RGB 2 IN> terminal, <DVI-D IN> terminal, the
<HDMI IN> terminal, or the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal.
f When [WIDE] is set, the image may be distorted because a signal is recognized as the same even if its synchronizing frequency varies
slightly.
Chapter 4Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
ENGLISH - 151
f When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in [WIDE], a registered signal with a high memory number receives priority.
Example: a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2, A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1.
f When a registration signal is deleted, the settings are also deleted.
f In an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal, signals are sometimes not determined correctly when the
setting is set to [WIDE].
Sub memory
The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it is
recognized as the same signal by the frequency or format of the synchronization signal source.
Use this function when you need to adjust the picture quality such as switching of the aspect ratio or white
balance by the same signal source. The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal,
such as the image aspect ratio and data adjusted in the [PICTURE] item ([CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], etc.).
Registering to the sub memory
1) While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw.
f The sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered. Proceed to Step 3).
f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
f The <FUNCTION> button on the remote control can be used instead of qw when [SUB MEMORY] is
selected from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [FUNCTION BUTTON].
2) Press asqw to select the sub memory number to register in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f To rename the registered signal, follow the procedure in Steps 6) and 7) in “Renaming the registered signal”
(x page 149).
Switching to the sub memory
1) While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw.
f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
2) Press asqw to select the signal to switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f This switches to the signal selected in Step 2).
Deleting the sub memory
1) While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw.
f The [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.
2) Press asqw to select the sub memory to be deleted, and press the <DEFAULT> button on the
remote control.
f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen.
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The selected sub memory will be deleted.
Chapter 4Settings — [SECURITY] menu
152 - ENGLISH
[SECURITY] menu
On the menu screen, select [SECURITY] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
f When the projector is used for the rst time
Initial password: Press awsqawsq in order, and press the <ENTER> button.
Attention
f When you select the [SECURITY] menu and press the <ENTER> button, entering a password is required. Enter the preset password and
then continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.
f When the password has been changed previously, enter the changed password, and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
f An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
Display the [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen when the power is turned on with the <MAIN POWER> switch set
to the <OFF> side. When the entered password is incorrect, the operation will be restricted to the power standby
<v> button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the <LENS> buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>).
1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the security password entry.
[ON] Enables the security password entry.
Note
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] setting is set to [OFF] by the factory default or when [ALL USER DATA] in [INITIALIZE] (x page 144) is
executed.
f Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
f The security password is enabled after setting [SECURITY PASSWORD] to [ON] and turning the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
Change the security password.
1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw and the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set the password.
f Up to eight button operations can be set.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
5) Re-enter the password for the confirmation.
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
f When numerical values are used for the security password, the security password is required to be initialized if the remote control is lost.
Consult your dealer for the method of initialization.
[DISPLAY SETTING]
Overlap the security message (text or image) over the projecting image.
1) Press as to select [DISPLAY SETTING].
Chapter 4Settings — [SECURITY] menu
ENGLISH - 153
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Hides the security message.
[TEXT]
Displays the text set in the [SECURITY] menu [TEXT CHANGE].
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
Note
f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
[TEXT CHANGE]
Edit the text to be displayed when [TEXT] is selected in [DISPLAY SETTING].
1) Press as to select [TEXT CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [TEXT CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The text is changed.
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
Enable/disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control.
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
[CONTROL PANEL] You can set the limitation on the control from the control panel.
[REMOTE CONTROL] You can set the limitation on the control from the remote control.
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
6) Press qw to switch the item.
f You can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control.
[ENABLE] Enables all button operations.
[DISABLE] Disables all button operations.
[USER]
Operation of all buttons can be enabled/disabled separately.
Refer to “Enabling/disabling any button” (x page 153) for details.
7) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
8) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Enabling/disabling any button
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
Chapter 4Settings — [SECURITY] menu
154 - ENGLISH
4) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.
5) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
6) Press qw to switch [USER].
7) Press as to select the button item to set.
f When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press as to select
the button to set.
Buttons that can be set
[CONTROL PANEL] [REMOTE CONTROL]
[POWER BUTTON]
Power standby <v> button, power on <b> button
[INPUT SELECT BUTTON]
<RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <DVI-D>
button, <HDMI> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button,
<SDI 1/2> button
<RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <VIDEO>
button, <S-VIDEO Y/C> button, <DVI-D> button,
<HDMI> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <SDI>
button, <INPUT MENU> button
[MENU BUTTON] <MENU> button
[LENS BUTTON] <LENS> button Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)
[AUTO SETUP BUTTON] <AUTO SETUP> button
[SHUTTER BUTTON] <SHUTTER> button
[ASPECT BUTTON] <ASPECT> button
[ON SCREEN BUTTON] <ON SCREEN> button
[OTHER BUTTON]
asqw, <ENTER> button
Buttons not listed above
8) Press qw to switch the item.
[ENABLE] Enables button operations.
[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
f Following items can be selected only when [SDI BUTTON] in [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected.
[TOGGLE] Switches between [SDI1] and [SDI2] when the button is operated.
[SDI1] Fixes to [SDI1].
[SDI2] Fixes to [SDI2].
[DISABLE] Disables button operations.
f Press the <MENU> button to return to the [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL]
screen when [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step 7).
9) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
f The conrmation screen is displayed.
10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f When a button operation is performed on the device set to [DISABLE], the [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
Enter the control device password.
f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen will disappear when there is no operation for approx. 10 seconds.
f If the operations of both [CONTROL PANEL] and [REMOTE CONTROL] are set to [DISABLE], the projector cannot be turned off (cannot
enter standby).
f When the setting has completed, the menu screen will disappear. To operate continuously, press the <MENU> button to display the main
menu.
f Even when you set button operations on the remote control disabled, operations of the <ID SET> and <ID ALL> buttons on the remote
control are kept enabled.
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
The control device password can be changed.
1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
Chapter 4Settings — [SECURITY] menu
ENGLISH - 155
4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
f To cancel, select [CANCEL].
Attention
f The initial password is “AAAA” by the factory default or when [ALL USER DATA] in [INITIALIZE] (x page 144) is executed.
f Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
156 - ENGLISH
[NETWORK] menu
On the menu screen, select [NETWORK] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 76) for the operation of the menu screen.
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]
Switch the communication method of the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the projector.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK MODE].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO] Switches the communication method automatically to DIGITAL LINK, long reach, or Ethernet.
[DIGITAL LINK] Fixes the communication method to DIGITAL LINK.
[LONG REACH] Fixes the communication method to long reach.
[ETHERNET] Fixes the communication method to Ethernet.
Possible communication modes
l: Communication possible
―: Communication not possible
Setting
Communication possible
Video transfer
(100 m (328'1"))
Video transfer
(150 m (492'2"))
Ethernet RS-232C
[AUTO]
For DIGITAL LINK
l
l l
For long reach
l l l
For Ethernet
l
*1
[DIGITAL LINK]
l
l l
[LONG REACH]
l l l
[ETHERNET]
l
*1
*1 Communication via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter is not available. Connect the projector to the network directly.
Note
f The maximum transmission distance when connected with the long-reach communication method is 150 m (492'2"). However, the signal
that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (148.5 MHz).
f When the communication method of the twist-pair-cable transmitter is set to long reach, the projector will connect with long-reach
communication method when [DIGITAL LINK MODE] is set to [AUTO]. To connect with the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.:
ET-YFB200G) with the long-reach communication method, set [DIGITAL LINK MODE] to [LONG REACH].
f Connection will not be made correctly if the twist-pair-cable transmitter is not supporting the long-reach communication method even if
[DIGITAL LINK MODE] is set to [LONG REACH].
[DIGITAL LINK SETUP]
Set the communication method of DIGITAL LINK or Ethernet.
When the projector is connected directly via Ethernet
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [DUPLEX(ETHERNET)].
4) Press qw to switch the communication method.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTONEGOTIATION] Sets the communication method automatically.
[100BaseTX-Full] Sets full-duplex communication method.
[100BaseTX-Half] Sets half-duplex communication method.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 157
5) Press as to select [STORE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
7) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and then press the <ENTER>
button.
Note
f The projector does not support 10BaseT Full/Half.
When the projector is connected to a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select [DUPLEX(DIGITAL LINK)].
4) Press qw to switch the communication method.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[100BaseTX-Full] Sets full-duplex communication method.
[100BaseTX-Half] Sets half-duplex communication method.
[AUTONEGOTIATION] Sets the communication method automatically.
5) Press as to select [STORE].
6) Press the <ENTER> button.
7) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and then press the <ENTER>
button.
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]
Display the DIGITAL LINK connection environment.
1) Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] screen is displayed.
[LINK STATUS] Either [NO LINK], [DIGITAL LINK], [LONG REACH], or [ETHERNET] is displayed.
[HDCP STATUS] Either [NO SIGNAL], [OFF], or [ON] is displayed.
[SIGNAL QUALITY]
[SIGNAL QUALITY] is a numerical value of the amount of error, and the display color changes to
green, yellow, or red depending on that value.
Check the signal quality level while receiving a signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
f [MAX]/[MIN]: Maximum/minimum value of the amount of error
f Green (
-
12 dB or lower) normal signal quality level.
f Yellow (
-
11 to
-
8 dB) caution level that noise may appear on the screen.
f Red (
-
7 dB or higher) abnormal level with interrupted synchronization and receiving not
possible.
[NETWORK SETUP]
Perform the initial setting of the network before using the network function.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK SETUP].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [NETWORK SETUP] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select an item, and change the settings according to the operation instructions of the
menu.
[PROJECTOR NAME] Allows to change the projector name. Enter the host name if it is required to use a DHCP server.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
158 - ENGLISH
[DHCP]
[ON]
If a DHCP server exists in the network where the projector is to be
connected, obtains the IP address automatically.
[OFF]
If a DHCP server does not exist in the network where the projector
is to be connected, set [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and
[DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[IP ADDRESS] Enter the IP address when a DHCP server is not used.
[SUBNET MASK] Enter the subnet mask when a DHCP server is not used.
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] Enter the default gateway address when a DHCP server is not used.
4) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f When using a DHCP server, conrm that the DHCP server is running.
f Consult your network administrator regarding the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
f When [Art-Net SETUP] is set to [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)], [NETWORK SETUP] cannot be selected.
[NETWORK CONTROL]
Set up the control method of the network.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK CONTROL].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3) Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.
[WEB CONTROL] Set to [ON] to control with the web browser.
[PJLink CONTROL] Set to [ON] to control with the PJLink protocol.
[COMMAND CONTROL]
Set to [ON] to control with the <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal control command format
(x page 202). Refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 196).
[COMMAND PORT] Set the port number used for command control.
[Crestron Connected(TM)] Set to [ON] to control with Crestron Connected
TM
of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
[AMX D.D.]
Set to [ON] to control with the controller of AMX Corporation.
Setting this function to [ON] enables detection through “AMX Device Discovery”. For details, visit the
website of AMX Corporation.
URL http://www.amx.com/
[EXTRON XTP]
Set to [ON] when connecting the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN>
terminal.
The [EXTRON XTP] setting must be set to [OFF] when connecting the optional DIGITAL LINK output
supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G).
For details of the “XTP transmitter”, visit the website of Extron Electronics.
URL http://www.extron.com/
4) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
[NETWORK STATUS]
Display the status of the projector network.
1) Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
[DHCP] Displays the status of use of the DHCP server.
[IP ADDRESS] Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
[SUBNET MASK] Displays the [SUBNET MASK].
[DEFAULT GATEWAY] Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[DNS1] Displays the address of the preferred DNS server.
[DNS2] Displays the address of the alternate DNS server.
[MAC ADDRESS] Displays the [MAC ADDRESS].
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 159
[DIGITAL LINK MENU]
When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected
to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal, the main menu of the connected DIGITAL LINK output supported device is
displayed. Refer to the Operating Instructions of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device for details.
Note
f [DIGITAL LINK MENU] cannot be selected when [EXTRON XTP] is set to [ON].
f The operation guidance for the “RETURN” button is in the menu screen of the Digital Interface Box and DIGITAL LINK Switcher. The
projector does not have the “RETURN” button, but the same operation is available with the <MENU> button.
[Art-Net SETUP]
Make settings to use the Art-Net function.
1) Press as to select [Art-Net SETUP].
2) Press qw to select an item.
f The items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF] Disables the Art-Net function.
[ON(2.X.X.X)] Enables the Art-Net function and sets the IP address to 2.X.X.X.
[ON(10.X.X.X)] Enables the Art-Net function and sets the IP address to 10.X.X.X.
[ON(MANUAL)] Enables the Art-Net function and uses the IP address set in [NETWORK SETUP].
f When other than [OFF] is selected, proceed to Step 3).
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [Art-Net SETUP] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select an item, and press qw to switch the setting.
[NET] Enter [NET] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
[SUB NET] Enter [SUB NET] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
[UNIVERSE] Enter [UNIVERSE] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
[START ADDRESS] Enter [START ADDRESS] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
5) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
6) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
f If [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)] is selected, IP address is calculated and set automatically.
[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]
Set the assignment of the channel.
For the channel denitions used for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function, refer to “Using Art-Net
function” (x page 193).
1) Press as to select [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING].
2) Press qw to switch the item.
[2] Uses the channel assignment in standard setting.
[USER] Changes the channel assignment.
[1]
Uses the channel assignment with DZ21K series compatible.
DZ21K series: DZ21K series, DS20K series, DW17K series, DZ16K series
f When [2] or [1] is selected, pressing the <ENTER> button displays the function assigned to the channel.
f When [USER] is selected, proceed to Step 3).
3) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] screen is displayed.
4) Press as to select the channel to set, and pressqw to switch the item.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
160 - ENGLISH
[LIGHT OUTPUT] Adjusts the amount of light.
[INPUT SELECT] Switches the input.
[LENS POSITION] Moves the lens position.
[LENS H SHIFT] Adjusts the lens shift in the horizontal direction.
[LENS V SHIFT] Adjusts the lens shift in the vertical direction.
[LENS FOCUS] Adjusts the focus.
[LENS ZOOM] Adjusts the zoom.
[POWER] Controls the power status.
[SHUTTER] Controls the shutter.
[GEOMETRY] Performs geometric adjustment.
[CUSTOM MASKING]
Performs geometric adjustment using the computer.
To use PC-1, PC-2, and PC-3, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required.
[FREEZE] Freezes the projected image.
[COLOR] Adjusts the color saturation.
[TINT] Adjusts the tint.
[RASTER PATTERN] Displays the raster pattern.
[ENABLE/DISABLE] Enables/disables the control of the projector with the Art-Net function.
[NONE] No denition
f The setting can be also made by pressing as to select the channel, pressing the <ENTER> button to
display the item list, pressing asqw to select the item, and pressing the <ENTER> button.
f Same item cannot be set for multiple channels, except for [NONE].
[Art-Net STATUS]
Display the content of control assigned to each channel and the received data of that channel.
1) Press as to select [Art-Net STATUS].
2) Press the <ENTER> button.
f The [Art-Net STATUS] screen is displayed.
Network connection
The projector has a network function, and the following operations are available from the computer using the web
control.
f Setting and adjustment of the projector
f Display of the projector status
f Sending E-mail messages when there is a problem with the projector
The projector supports “Crestron Connected
TM
”, and the following application software of Crestron Electronics,
Inc. can be used.
f RoomView Express
f Fusion RV
f RoomView Server Edition
Attention
f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
Note
f “Crestron Connected
TM
” is a system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems
connected to a network using a computer.
f For details of the “Crestron Connected
TM
”, visit the website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only.)
URL http://www.crestron.com
Download “RoomView Express” from the Crestron Electronics, Inc. website. (English only.)
URL http://www.crestron.com/getroomview
f A LAN cable is required to use the network function.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 161
r Example of a normal network connection
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)
Hub
f A web browser is required to use this function. Conrm that the web browser can be used beforehand.
Supported browser: Internet Explorer 8.0/9.0/10.0/11.0 (Windows OS), Safari 6.0/7.0/8.0 (Mac OS)
f Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Conrm that the E-mail can be used beforehand.
f Use a LAN cable that is straight cable and compatible with category 5 or higher.
f Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.
Connecting to a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
The projector has a function that can receive Ethernet signals from a twisted-pair-cable transmitter together
with video and audio signals via a LAN cable. Connect a LAN cable to the <DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal of the
projector. (x pages 21, 30)
r Example of network connections via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)LAN cable (straight)
Twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Hub
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
162 - ENGLISH
f For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
g Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
g Shielded type (including connectors)
g Straight-through
g Single wire
f The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1"). It is possible to
transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method. If this distance is
exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN communication.
f When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, conrm that cable characteristics are compatible with
CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
f Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
f Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
f To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
f Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
f When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
f After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and conrm that the value of [SIGNAL QUALITY] is
displayed in green which indicates normal quality. (x page 157)
f For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been veried with the projector, visit the Panasonic
website (http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/). Note that the verication for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set
by Panasonic Corporation, and not all the operations have been veried. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of
other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
Accessing from the web browser
1) Start up the web browser on the computer.
2) Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser.
3) Enter the user name and the password.
f The factory default setting of the user name is user1 (user rights)/admin1 (administrator rights) and the
password is panasonic (lower case).
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 163
4) Click OK.
f The [Projector status] page is displayed.
Note
f If you use a web browser to control the projector, set [WEB CONTROL] to [ON] in [NETWORK CONTROL] (x page 158).
f Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers. Do not set or control the projector from multiple
computers.
f Change the password rst. (x page 177)
f The administrator rights allow use of all functions. The user rights allow use of [Projector status] (x page 165), conrmation of the error
information page (x page 166), [Network status] (x page 167), [Basic control] (x page 169), and [Change password] (x page 177)
only.
f Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.
f Some items on the projector setting page use the Javascript function of the web browser. The projector may not be able to be controlled
properly if this function is disabled on the browser settings.
f If the screen for the web control is not displayed, consult your network administrator.
f While updating the screen for the web control, the screen may appear white for a moment, but it is not a malfunction.
f Screenshot of a computer
The size or the display of the screen may be different from this manual depending on the OS or the Web browser you use.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
164 - ENGLISH
Descriptions of items
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Page tab
Switches pages by clicking this item.
2 [Status]
The status of the projector is displayed by clicking this item.
3 [Projector control]
The [Projector control] page is displayed by clicking this item.
4 [Detailed set up]
The [Detailed set up] page is displayed by clicking this item.
5 [Change password]
The [Change password] page is displayed by clicking this item.
6 [Crestron Connected(TM)]
The operation page of Crestron Connected
TM
is displayed by
clicking this item.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 165
[Projector status] page
Click [Status] [Projector status].
Display the status of the projector for the following items.
14
17
18
7
10
8
9
1
2
3
4
19
5
6
11
12
13
16
15
1 [PROJECTOR TYPE]
Displays the type of the projector.
2 [MAIN VERSION]
Displays the rmware version of the projector.
3 [POWER]
Displays the status of the power.
4 [SHUTTER]
Displays the status of shutter function (ON: enabled (closed),
OFF: disabled (open)).
5 [OPERATING MODE]
Displays the setting status of [OPERATING MODE].
6 [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]
Displays the setting status of [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].
7 [SERIAL NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the projector.
8 [REMOTE2 STATUS]
Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.
9 [OSD]
Displays the status of the on-screen display.
10 [AC VOLTAGE]
Displays the input supply voltage.
11 [LIGHT OUTPUT]
Displays the setting status of [LIGHT OUTPUT].
12 [INPUT]
Displays the status of the selected input.
13 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector.
14 [OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.
15 [EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the
projector.
16 [AROUND LIGHT1 TEMPERATURE], [AROUND LIGHT2
TEMPERATURE]
Displays the temperature status of the light source.
17 [LD1-1], [LD1-2], [LD1-3], [LD1-4], [LD1-5], [LD1-6], [LD2-1],
[LD2-2], [LD2-3], [LD2-4], [LD2-5], [LD2-6]
Displays the lighting status and runtime of the light source.
18 [SELF TEST]
Displays the self-diagnosis information.
19 [PROJECTOR RUNTIME]
Displays the runtime of the projector.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
166 - ENGLISH
Error information page
When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the [SELF TEST] display eld of the [Projector status]
screen, click it to display the content of the error/warning.
f The projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the error.
1
1 Self-diagnosis result display
Displays the item check results.
[OK]:
Indicates that operation is normal.
[FAILED]:
Indicates that there is a problem.
[WARNING]:
Indicates that there is a warning.
r [FAILED] items
Item Description
[MAIN CPU BUS] There is a problem with the microcomputer circuitry. Consult your dealer.
[FAN] There is a problem with the fan or the fan drive circuit. Consult your dealer.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
The intake air temperature is high. The projector may be used in an environment where
the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]
The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is high. The projector
may be used in an environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating
appliance.
[EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE]
The exhaust air temperature is high. The projector may be used in an environment
where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance. Or the air exhaust port
may be blocked.
[LD1 TEMPERATURE] The temperature of the light source is high. The projector may be used in an
environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.
[LD2 TEMPERATURE]
[LD1 STATUS] The light source has failed to turn on. Consult your dealer.
[LD2 STATUS]
[SHUTTER(MUTE-SHUTTER)] There is a problem with the shutter circuitry. Consult your dealer.
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect intake temperature. Consult your
dealer.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect temperature inside the projector.
Consult your dealer.
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the sensor used to detect exhaust air temperature. Consult your
dealer.
[LD1 TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the temperature detection sensor of light source 1. Consult your
dealer.
[LD2 TEMP.SENSOR]
There is a problem with the temperature detection sensor of light source 2. Consult your
dealer.
[POWER CIRCUIT TEMPERATURE] The temperature around the power circuit is high. The air intake port may be blocked.
[FPGA TEMPERATURE] The temperature inside the projector is high. The air intake port may be blocked.
[LENS MOUNTER] There is a problem in the lens mounter. Consult your dealer.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 167
Item Description
[BRIGHTNESS SENSOR]
There is a problem with the luminance sensor. If problems persist even after switching
on the power, consult your dealer.
[PHOSPHOR WHEEL1]
There is a problem with the phosphor wheel 1 or phosphor wheel 1 drive circuit. Consult
your dealer.
[PHOSPHOR WHEEL2]
There is a problem with the phosphor wheel 2 or phosphor wheel 2 drive circuit. Consult
your dealer.
[FILTER UNIT]
The air lter unit is not attached. Check the connection of the air lter unit.
(x page 184)
r [WARNING] items
Item Description
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
The intake temperature is high. The projector may be used in an environment where the
temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.
[OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]
The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is high. The projector
may be used in an environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating
appliance.
[EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE]
The exhaust air temperature is high. The projector may be used in an environment
where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance. Or the air exhaust port
may be blocked.
[LD1 TEMPERATURE] The temperature of the light source is high. The projector may be used in an
environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.
[LD2 TEMPERATURE]
[POWER CIRCUIT TEMPERATURE] The temperature around the power circuit is high. The air intake port may be blocked.
[FPGA TEMPERATURE] The temperature inside the projector is high. The air intake port may be blocked.
[BATTERY] Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
[AIR FILTER]
There is too much dust accumulated in the air lter. Set the <MAIN POWER> switch to
<OFF> (x page 63), and clean the air lter. (x page 184)
[AC VOLTAGE]
The input supply voltage is low. Use electric wiring that can sufciently withstand the
power consumption of the projector.
[LOW-TEMPERATURE]
The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is low. Projection cannot
be started until the optics module becomes warm.
[Network status] page
Click [Status] [Network status].
The current network setting status is displayed.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
168 - ENGLISH
[Access error log] page
Click [Status] [Access error log].
The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with
unauthorized user names or passwords.
[Mail error log] page
Click [Status] [Mail error log].
E-mail error log is displayed if periodic E-mail sending has failed.
Note
f [Access error log] and [Mail error log] display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. All information may not be displayed when many
accesses/requests are made at once.
f Logs in [Access error log] and [Mail error log] are deleted from the oldest when exceeding a certain amount.
f Check [Access error log] and [Mail error log] periodically.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 169
[Basic control] page
Click [Projector control] [Basic control].
1
2
3
4
6
5
1 [POWER]
Turns on/off the power.
2 [SHUTTER]
Switches whether to use the shutter function (enabled (shutter:
closed)/disabled (shutter: open)).
3 [OSD]
Switches on (display)/off (hide) the on-screen display function.
4 [SYSTEM]
Switches the system method.
5 On-screen display of the projector
Displays the same items as shown on the on-screen display
of the projector. You can check or change the settings of the
menus. It is displayed even if the on-screen display function is
set to off (hide).
6 [INPUT SELECT]
Switches the input signal.
The content of display for the input selection button is different
depending on the model of the projector.
[Detail control] page
Click [Projector control] [Detail control].
5
4
6
3
2
1
11
9
8
7
10
1 Control of the projector
The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same
way as the buttons on the remote control. After control, the on-
screen display of the projector at the right of the control page is
updated.
2 [SUB MEMORY]
Switches the sub memory.
3 [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
Switches to system daylight view settings.
4 [FREEZE]
Temporarily pauses the image.
5 [P IN P]
Switches the P IN P setting.
6 [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
Switches the ip horizontal settings.
7 [WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Displays the waveform of the input signal.
8 [PROJECTION METHOD]
Switches the setting of the projection method.
9 [LENS]
Adjusts the projection lens.
10 [TEST PATTERN]
Displays the test pattern.
11 [GET OSD]
Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the
control page.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
170 - ENGLISH
[Network cong] page
Click [Detailed set up] [Network cong].
f Click [Network cong] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.
f The current settings are displayed by pressing the [Next] button.
f Click [Change] to display the setting change screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 [PROJECTOR NAME]
Enter the name of the projector. Enter the host name if it is
required when using a DHCP server etc.
2 [DHCP ON], [DHCP OFF]
To enable the DHCP client function, set to [DHCP ON].
3 [IP ADDRESS]
Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server.
4 [SUBNET MASK]
Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server.
5 [DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP
server.
6 [DNS1]
Enter the DNS1 server address.
Permissible characters for the entry of DNS1 server address
(primary):
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.253)
7 [DNS2]
Enter the DNS2 server address.
Available characters for the entry of DNS2 server address
(secondary):
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.254)
8 [Back], [Next]
Click the [Back] button to return to the original screen. The
current settings are displayed by pressing the [Next] button.
Click the [Submit] button to update the settings.
Note
f When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired” may appear. In that case, click
[Network cong] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.
f Changing LAN settings while connected to the LAN may cause the connection to cut out.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 171
[Adjust clock] page
Click [Detailed set up] [Adjust clock].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 [Time Zone]
Select the time zone.
2 [Set time zone]
Updates the time zone setting.
3 [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION]
Set to [ON] to adjust the date and time automatically.
4 [NTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when
you set to adjust the date and time manually.
(To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.)
5 [Date]
Enter the date to be changed.
6 [Time]
Enter the time to be changed.
7 [Submit]
Updates the date and time settings.
Note
f The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult
your dealer.
[Ping test] page
Check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.
Click [Detailed set up] [Ping test].
1
2
3
4
1 [Input IP address]
Enter the IP address of the server to be tested.
2 [Submit]
Executes the connection test.
3 Example of display when the connection has succeeded
4 Example of display when the connection has failed
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
172 - ENGLISH
[E-mail set up] page
Send an E-mail to preset E-mail addresses (up to two addresses) when a problem has occurred.
Click [Detailed set up] [E-mail set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 [ENABLE]
Select [Enable] to use the E-mail function.
2 [SMTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail server
(SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be
set up.
3 [MAIL FROM]
Enter the E-mail address of the projector. (Up to 63 characters
in single byte)
4 [MEMO]
Enter information such as the location of the projector that
noties the sender of the E-mail. (Up to 63 characters in single
byte)
5 [MINIMUM TIME]
Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning
E-mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this case, another
E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the
temperature warning E-mail even if it reaches the warning
temperature.
6 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning
mail. A temperature warning E-mail is sent when the
temperature exceeds this value.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 173
8
7
9
8
7
7 [E-MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2]
Enter the E-mail address to be sent. Leave [E-MAIL ADDRESS
2] blank when two E-mail addresses are not to be used.
8 Settings of the conditions to send E-mail
Select the conditions to send E-mail.
[MAIL CONTENTS]:
Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].
[ERROR]:
Send an E-mail when an error occurred in the self-diagnosis.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:
Send an E-mail when the intake air temperature has reached
the value set at the above eld.
[PERIODIC REPORT]:
Place a check mark on this to send an E-mail periodically.
It will be sent on the days and time with the check mark.
9 [Submit]
Update the settings.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
174 - ENGLISH
[Authentication set up] page
Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E-mail.
Click [Detailed set up] [Authentication set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 [Auth]
Select the authentication method specied by your Internet
service provider.
2 [SMTP Auth]
Set when the SMTP authentication is selected.
3 [POP server name]
Enter the POP server name.
Allowed characters:
Alphanumerics (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9)
Minus sign (-) and period (.)
4 [User name]
Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP server.
5 [Password]
Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server.
6 [SMTP server port]
Enter the port number of the SMTP server.
(Normally 25)
7 [POP server port]
Enter the port number of the POP server.
(Normally 110)
8 [Submit]
Update the settings.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 175
Contents of E-mail sent
Example of the E-mail sent when E-mail is set
The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.
=== Panasonic projector report (CO NFI G URE) ===
Projector Type : RZ 12K
Serial No : 123456789012
----- E-mail setup data -----
TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP
MINIMUM TIME at [ 60] minutes interval
INT AKE AIR T EMPERAT URE O ver [ 46 degC / 114 degF ]
ERROR [ OFF ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OFF ]
PERIODIC REPO RT
Sunday [ O N ] Monday [ O N ] T uesday [ O N ] Wednesday [ O N ]
T hursday [ O N ] F riday [ O N ] Sat urday [ O N ]
00:00 [ O N ] 01: 00 [ O N ] 02: 00 [ O N ] 03: 00 [ O N ]
04:00 [ O N ] 05: 00 [ O N ] 06: 00 [ O N ] 07: 00 [ O N ]
08:00 [ O N ] 09: 00 [ O N ] 10: 00 [ O N ] 11: 00 [ O N ]
12:00 [ O N ] 13: 00 [ O N ] 14: 00 [ O N ] 15: 00 [ O N ]
16:00 [ O N ] 17: 00 [ O N ] 18: 00 [ O N ] 19: 00 [ O N ]
20:00 [ O N ] 21: 00 [ O N ] 22: 00 [ O N ] 23: 00 [ O N ]
----- check system -----
MAIN CPU BUS [ OK ]
FAN [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LD1 TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LD2 TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LD1 STATUS [ OK ]
LD2 STATUS [ OK ]
SHUTT ER(MUT E-SHUT T ER) [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
FILTER UNIT [ OK ]
AIR FILTER [ OK ]
AC VOLTAGE [ OK ]
(Error code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00)
Intake air temperature : 30 degC / 86 degF
O pt ics module t emperat ure : 39 degC / 102 degF
Exhaust air temperature : 32 degC / 89 degF
Around light1 t emperature : 34 degC / 93 degF
Around light2 t emperature : 34 degC / 93 degF
PROJECT O R RUNT I ME 77 H
POWER O N 1906 t imes
LD1-1 O N 1906 times
LD1-1 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-2 O N 1906 times
LD1-2 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-3 O N 1906 times
LD1-3 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-4 O N 1906 times
LD1-4 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-5 O N 1906 times
LD1-5 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-6 O N 1906 times
LD1-6 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD2-1 O N 1900 times
LD2-1 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-2 O N 1900 times
LD2-2 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-3 O N 1900 times
LD2-3 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-4 O N 1900 times
LD2-4 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-5 O N 1900 times
LD2-5 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-6 O N 1900 times
LD2-6 RUNT I ME 75 H
-------- Current status ---------
MAIN VERSION 0.24
SUB VERSION 0.04.01
LD STATUS
LD1-1=ON LD1-2=ON LD1-3=ON LD1-4=O F F LD1-5=O F F LD1-6=ON
LD2-1=ON LD2-2=ON LD2-3=ON LD2-4=O F F LD2-5=O F F LD2-6=OF F
INPUT SDI 1
SIGNAL NAME ---
SIGNAL FREQ UENCY ---kHz / ---Hz
REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE
----- Wired Network configuration -----
DHCP Client OF F
IP address 192.168.0. 8
MAC address 12:34: 56: 78: 90:12
Mon Jan 01 12: 34: 56 20XX
----- Memo -----
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
176 - ENGLISH
Example of the E-mail sent for an error
The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred.
=== Panasonic projector report (ERROR) ===
Projector Type : RZ 12K
Serial No : 123456789012
----- check system -----
MAIN CPU BUS [ FAILED ]
FAN [ OK ]
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LD1 TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LD2 TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
LD1 STATUS [ OK ]
LD2 STATUS [ OK ]
SHUTT ER(MUT E-SHUT T ER) [ O K ]
INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
EXHAUST AIR TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
LD1 TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
LD2 TEMP.SENSOR [ OK ]
POWER CIRCUIT T EMPERAT URE [ O K ]
FPGA TEMPERATURE [ OK ]
BATTERY [ OK ]
LENS MOUNT ER [ OK ]
BRIGHTNESS SENSOR [ OK ]
PHOSPHOR WHEEL1 [ OK ]
PHOSPHOR WHEEL2 [ OK ]
FILTER UNIT [ OK ]
AIR FILTER [ OK ]
AC VOLTAGE [ OK ]
(Error code 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00)
Intake air temperature : 30 degC / 86 degF
O pt ics module t emperat ure : 39 degC / 102 degF
Exhaust air temperature : 32 degC / 89 degF
Around light1 t emperature : 34 degC / 93 degF
Around light2 t emperature : 34 degC / 93 degF
PROJECT O R RUNT I ME 77 H
POWER O N 1906 times
LD1-1 O N 1906 t imes
LD1-1 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-2 O N 1906 t imes
LD1-2 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-3 O N 1906 t imes
LD1-3 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-4 O N 1906 t imes
LD1-4 O N 1906 t imes
LD1-4 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-5 O N 1906 t imes
LD1-5 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD1-6 O N 1906 t imes
LD1-6 RUNT I ME 76 H
LD2-1 O N 1900 t imes
LD2-1 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-2 O N 1900 t imes
LD2-2 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-3 O N 1900 t imes
LD2-3 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-4 O N 1900 t imes
LD2-4 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-5 O N 1900 t imes
LD2-5 RUNT I ME 75 H
LD2-6 O N 1900 t imes
LD2-6 RUNT I ME 75 H
-------- Current status ---------
MAIN VERSION 0.24
SUB VERSION 0.04.01
LD STATUS
LD1-1=ON LD1-2=ON LD1-3=ON LD1-4=O F F LD1-5=O F F LD1-6=ON
LD2-1=ON LD2-2=ON LD2-3=ON LD2-4=O F F LD2-5=O F F LD2-6=OF F
INPUT SDI1
SIGNAL NAME ---
SIGNAL FREQ UENCY ---kHz / ---Hz
REMOTE2 STATUS DISABLE
----- Wired Network configuration -----
DHCP Client OFF
IP address 192.168.0. 8
MAC address 12: 34: 56: 78: 90: 12
Mon Jan 01 12: 34: 56 20XX
----- Memo -----
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 177
[Change password] page
Click [Change password].
1
2
3
1 [Administrator]
Used to change the setting of the [Administrator].
2 [User]
Used to change the setting of the [User].
3 [Next]
Used to change the setting of the password.
[Administrator] account
1
3
2
4
1 [Account]
Displays the account to change.
2 [Current]
[User name]:
Enter the user name before the change.
[Password]:
Enter the current password.
3 [New]
[User name]:
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
4 [OK]
Determines the change of password.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
178 - ENGLISH
[User] account
1
2
3
1 [Account]
Displays the account to change.
2 [New]
[User name]:
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
3 [OK]
Determines the change of password.
[Change password] (For user rights)
Only the change of password is enabled under the user rights.
1
2
4
3
1 [Old Password]
Enter the current password.
2 [New Password]
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
3 [Retype]
Enter the desired new password again.
4 [OK]
Determines the change of password.
Note
f To change the account of the administrator, you must enter the [User name] and [Password] in [Current].
[Crestron Connected(TM)] page
The projector can be monitored/controlled with Crestron Connected
TM
.
It is necessary to access with the administrator rights to start the operation screen of Crestron Connected
TM
from
the web control screen. (The [Crestron Connected(TM)] button is not displayed in the web control screen with the
user rights.)
The operation page of Crestron Connected
TM
is displayed by clicking [Crestron Connected(TM)].
It is not displayed if Adobe Flash Player is not installed on your computer, or the browser you use does not
support Flash. In such a case, click [Back] in the operation page to go back to the previous page.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
ENGLISH - 179
Operation page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 [Tools], [Info], [Help]
Tabs for selecting the setting, information, or help page of the
projector.
2 [POWER]
Turns on/off the power.
3 [SHUTTER]
Switches whether to use the shutter function (enabled (shutter:
closed)/disabled (shutter: open)).
4 [Input Select]
Controls input selection.
Not available when the power of the projector is turned off.
5 Menu screen control buttons
Navigates the menu screen.
6 Freeze/image quality adjustment
Controls items related to freeze/image quality.
7 [Back]
Returns to the previous page.
[Tools] page
Click [Tools] in the operation page.
1
2
3
4
5
1 [Control System]
Set the information required for communicating with the
controller to be connected with the projector.
2 [User Password]
Set the user rights password for the operation page of Crestron
Connected
TM
.
3 [Admin Password]
Set the administrator rights password for the operation page of
Crestron Connected
TM
.
4 Network status
Displays the settings of wired LAN.
[DHCP]
Displays the current setting.
[Ip Address]
Displays the current setting.
[Subnet Mask]
Displays the current setting.
[Default Gateway]
Displays the current setting.
[DNS Server]
Displays the current setting.
5 [Exit]
Returns to the operation page.
Chapter 4Settings — [NETWORK] menu
180 - ENGLISH
[Info] page
Click [Info] in the operation page.
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
1 [Projector Name]
Displays the projector name.
2 [Mac Address]
Displays the MAC address.
3 [Lamp1 Hours], [Lamp2 Hours]
Displays the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2.
4 [Power Status]
Displays the status of the power.
5 [Source]
Displays the selected input.
6 [Error Status]
Displays the error status.
7 [Exit]
Returns to the operation page.
[Help] page
Click [Help] in the operation page.
The [Help Desk] window is displayed.
1
1 [Help Desk]
A message can be sent/received with the administrator using
the Crestron Connected
TM
.
ENGLISH - 181
Chapter 5 Maintenance
This chapter describes methods of inspection when there are problems, maintenance, and replacement of the
units.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Light source/temperature/lter indicators
182 - ENGLISH
Light source/temperature/lter indicators
When an indicator lights up
If a problem occurs inside the projector, the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2>, temperature indicator
<TEMP>, or lter indicator <FILTER> will inform you by lighting or blinking in red. Check the status of the
indicators and take following measures.
Attention
f When switching off the projector to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the projector” (x page 63).
Light source indicator <LIGHT1>
Light source indicator <LIGHT2>
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2>
Indicator status
Blinking in red
(2 times)
Blinking in red
(3 times)
Status The light source does not light up, or the light source turns off while the projector is in use.
Cause
Solution
f Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> (x page 63), and turn on the power again.
Note
f If the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> are still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.
f The light source indicator corresponding to the light source being lit will light up in green if the projector is in projection mode and there is no
indication of problem by lighting or blinking in red.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Light source/temperature/lter indicators
ENGLISH - 183
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Indicator status Lighting in red
Blinking in red
(2 times)
Blinking in red
(3 times)
Status Warm-up status
Internal temperature is high
(warning).
Internal temperature is high
(standby status).
The cooling fan has
stopped.
Cause
f Did you turn on the power
when the temperature
was low (around 0 °C
(32 °F))?
f Is the air intake/exhaust port blocked?
f Is the room temperature high?
f Is the lter indicator <FILTER> lit?
Solution
f Wait at least ve minutes
in the current status.
f Install the projector in a
location with the operating
environment temperature
between 0 °C (32 °F) and
50 °C (122 °F)
*1
.
f Remove any objects that are blocking the air intake/
exhaust port.
f Install the projector in a location with the operating
environment temperature between 0 °C (32 °F) and
50 °C (122 °F)
*1
, and ambient humidity between 10 %
and 80 % (no condensation).
f Clean or replace the air lter unit. (x page 184)
f Turn the <MAIN POWER>
switch to <OFF>
(x page 63), and
consult your dealer.
*1 The operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 45 °C (113 °F) if the projector is used at an altitude between 1 400 m
(4 593') and 4 200 m (13 780') above sea level. When [OPERATING MODE] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING] is
set to [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or [LONG LIFE3], the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 45 °C
(113 °F), and when the Smoke Cut Filter is used, it should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F) regardless of the altitude.
When [OPERATING MODE] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING] is set to [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or
[LONG LIFE3], the projector cannot be used at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level. When the Smoke Cut Filter is used, the
projector cannot be used at an altitude of 1 400 m (4 593') or higher above sea level.
Note
f If the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Indicator status Lighting in red Blinking in red
Status
The lter is clogged.
The temperature inside or outside the projector is abnormally high.
The air lter unit is not
attached.
Cause f Is the air lter unit dirty?
f Is the air intake/exhaust
port blocked?
f Is the projector used at
an altitude of 4 200 m
(13 780')
*1
or higher
above sea level?
f Is the air lter unit
attached?
Solution
f Clean or replace the air
lter unit. (x page 184)
f Remove any objects that
are blocking the air intake/
exhaust port.
f Do not use the projector
at an altitude of 4 200 m
(13 780')
*1
or higher
above sea level.
f Attach the air lter unit.
*1 When [OPERATING MODE] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING] is set to [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or
[LONG LIFE3], the projector cannot be used at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level. When the Smoke Cut Filter is used, the
projector cannot be used at an altitude of 1 400 m (4 593') or higher above sea level.
Note
f If the lter indicator <FILTER> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
184 - ENGLISH
Maintenance/replacement
Before performing maintenance/replacement
f Make sure to turn off the power before maintaining or replacing the unit. (x pages 54, 63)
f When switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector”
(x page 63).
Maintenance
Outer case
Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.
f If the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with
a dry cloth.
f Do not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may
deteriorate the outer case.
f When using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.
Lens front surface
Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.
f Do not use a cloth that is uffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.
f Since the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.
Attention
f The lens is made of glass. Impacts or excessive force when wiping may scratch its surface. Handle with care.
Air lter unit
Perform maintenance of the air lter unit in the following cases.
f The air lter is clogged with dust, causing the lter replacement message to appear on the screen and the lter
indicator <FILTER> to light in red.
Attention
f Make sure to turn off the power before performing maintenance on the air lter unit.
f Make sure that the projector is stable, and perform the maintenance in a safe place even if you drop it accidentally.
Removing the air lter unit
Air filter cover fixing screw
Air filter cover
Fig. 1
Tabs on the
projector body
Tabs on the projector
body
Air filter unit
Air filter unit compartment and the
projector’s air intake port
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
1) Remove the air filter cover. (Fig. 1)
f Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the air lter cover screw counterclockwise until it turns freely, and then
remove the air lter cover.
f Loosen the air lter cover xing screw while putting your hand on.
2) Pull out the air filter unit.
f Pull out the air lter unit frame from the tabs of the projector body while slightly pressing around the center
of the frame at the front side (with the lens) inward as described with the arrow, and pull out the frame at the
opposite side from the tabs to remove the air lter unit. (Fig. 2)
Chapter 5Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
ENGLISH - 185
f After pulling out the air lter unit, remove large foreign objects and dust from the air lter unit compartment
and the air intake port of the projector body if there are any. (Fig. 3)
Cleaning the air lter unit
Remove the air lter unit beforehand with the previously described procedure of “Removing the air lter unit”.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1) Wash the air filter unit. (Fig. 1)
i) Soak the air filter unit in cold or warm water and then lightly rinse it.
f Do not use cleaning tools such as brushes.
f When rinsing, hold the frame of the air lter unit without putting strong pressure on the lter unit.
ii) Rinse the air filter unit two to three times using fresh water each time.
f Insufcient rinsing may result in odors.
2) Dry the air filter unit. (Fig. 2)
f Let the air lter unit naturally dry off in a well-ventilated place where there is little dust and is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
f Do not dry using drying devices such as dryers.
f After the air lter is dried, proceed to “Attaching the air lter unit” (x page 185).
Attaching the air lter unit
Protrusion of the air filter unit
Tabs on the projector body
Tabs on the projector body
Groove on the projector body
Protrusion of the air filter unit
Groove on the projector body
1) Attach the air filter unit to the projector.
f The air lter unit has no difference between top and bottom, but is two-sided. Match the protrusion position
of the air lter unit with the grooves on the projector body.
f Hook the air lter unit frame at the air exhaust port side to the two tabs of the back side of the projector’s air
lter unit compartment and perform Step 2) in “Removing the air lter unit” in the reverse order to attach.
f Conrm that the tabs of the air lter unit compartment of the projector body are hooked to the air lter unit
frame.
2) Attach the air filter cover to the projector and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the air filter cover
screw.
f Attach the air lter cover by performing Step 1) in “Removing the air lter unit” (x page 184) in the reverse
order.
Attention
f After washing the air lter unit, dry it thoroughly before attaching it back to the projector. Attaching a wet unit will cause an electric shock or
malfunction.
f Do not disassemble the air lter unit.
f Take care not to touch the air intake fan in the air lter unit compartment when removing dirt or dust.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
186 - ENGLISH
Note
f Make sure that the air lter unit is properly attached before using the projector. If it is not properly attached, the projector will suck in dirt and
dust causing a malfunction.
f If you use the projector without attaching the air lter unit, the lter indicator <FILTER> blinks in red and the message appears on the
projected image for approximately 30 seconds.
f Replace the air lter unit with the new optional Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET-EMF330) if it is damaged or if the dirt does not come
off even after washing.
f Air lter replacement is recommended after cleaning the unit two times.
f The dust-proof properties may be reduced after each cleaning.
Replacing the unit
Air lter unit
If dirt does not come off even after the unit is maintained, it is time for the unit to be replaced.
The Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET-EMF330) is an optional accessory. To purchase the product, consult
your dealer.
Replacing the air lter unit
Attention
f Make sure to turn off the power before replacing the air lter unit.
f When attaching the unit, make sure that the projector is stable, and perform the replacement in a safe place even if you drop it accidentally.
1) Remove the air filter unit.
f Refer to “Removing the air lter unit” (x page 184).
2) Attach the optional Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET-EMF330) to the projector.
f The air lter unit has no difference between top and bottom, but is two-sided. Match the protrusion position
of the air lter unit with the grooves on the projector body.
f Refer to “Attaching the air lter unit” (x page 185).
Attention
f When switching on the projector, make sure that the air lter unit is attached. If it is not properly attached, the projector will suck in dirt and
dust causing a malfunction.
f If you use the projector without attaching the air lter unit, the lter indicator <FILTER> blinks in red and the message appears on the
projected image for approximately 30 seconds.
Note
f The replacement cycle of the air lter unit varies greatly depending on the usage environment.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Troubleshooting
ENGLISH - 187
Troubleshooting
Review the following points. For details, see the corresponding pages.
Problems Points to be checked Page
Power does not turn on.
f Is the power plug rmly inserted into the outlet?
f Is the <MAIN POWER> switch set to <OFF>? 63
f Is the wall outlet supplying electricity?
f Have the circuit breakers tripped?
f Are the light source indicators <LIGHT1>/<LIGHT2> or the temperature indicator
<TEMP> lighting or blinking?
182
No image appears.
f Are connections to external devices correctly performed? 48
f Is the input selection setting correct? 70
f Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum? 83
f Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly?
f Is the shutter function in use? 71
f If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is blinking in red, consult your dealer.
f Is the lens cover still attached to the lens? 55
Image is fuzzy.
f Is the lens focus set correctly? 64
f Is the projection distance appropriate? 35
f Is the lens dirty? 22
f Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen?
Color is pale or grayish.
f Are [COLOR] and [TINT] adjusted correctly? 83
f Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly? 48
f Is the RGB cable damaged?
Remote control does not
respond.
f Are the batteries depleted?
f Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly? 31
f Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control
signal receiver of the projector?
26
f Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range? 27
f Are other forms of light, such as uorescent light, affecting the projection? 27
f Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
[DISABLE]?
153
f Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control? 203
f Is the ID number setting operation correct? 74
Menu screen does not
appear.
f Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)? 118
Buttons on the control
panel do not operate.
f Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
[DISABLE]?
153
f Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control? 203
Image does not display
correctly.
f Is the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] selection set correctly? 88
f Is the [RGB1 INPUT SETTING] setting made correctly? 112
f Is there a problem with the video tape or other image sources?
f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 206
Image from a computer
does not appear.
f Is the cable too long? (For D-Sub cables, the cable length should be 10 m (32'10")
or shorter.)
f Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The external
output settings may be switched by pressing the “Fn” + “F3” or “Fn” + “F10”
simultaneously. Since the method varies depending on the computer type, refer to
the user manual provided with your computer.)
Image output from DVI-D
of the computer does not
appear.
f Is the [EDID SELECT] setting in [DVI-D IN] set to [EDID3] or [EDID2:PC]? 113
f The graphics accelerator driver of the computer may need to be updated to the
latest version.
f The condition may be improved by making the [EDID SELECT] setting in [DVI-D IN]
and then restarting the computer.
113
Video from HDMI
compatible device does
not appear or it appears
jumbled.
f Is the HDMI cable connected securely? 48
f Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on.
f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input? 206
Lens shift cannot be
adjusted.
f Perform [LENS CALIBRATION]. 140
f Is the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE50) attached?
Chapter 5Maintenance — Troubleshooting
188 - ENGLISH
Problems Points to be checked Page
Cannot control the
projector with Art-Net.
f Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and an external
device, and between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and projector correctly done?
f Is [Art-Net SETUP] set to other than [OFF]? 159
f Are [NET], [SUB NET], [UNIVERSE], and [START ADDRESS] set correctly? 159
The DIGITAL LINK input
image is not displayed.
f Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector or
an external device correctly done?
f Is [DIGITAL LINK MODE] set to [AUTO] or [DIGITAL LINK]? Is it set to
[ETHERNET]?
156
f Is a signal which is not compatible with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter being input?
3D function is not working.
f Is the [3D INPUT FORMAT] setting of [3D SETTINGS] correct? 103
f Check the 3D eyewear settings.
f Is a signal which is supported by the projector being input? 209
Left and right images are
reversed (not showing
properly).
f Is it synchronized? Check the 3D eyewear settings.
f Change the [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] setting of [3D SETTINGS]. 103
Image in the 3D eyewear
ickers.
f Are you within the reception range?
3D eyewear is not
functioning.
f Is the battery for 3D eyewear dead? Charge the battery for the rechargeable 3D
eyewear. Change the battery for the battery type.
f Is the [3D SETTINGS] setting correct? 102
Attention
f If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.
Chapter 5Maintenance — Self-diagnosis display
ENGLISH - 189
Self-diagnosis display
There is a self-diagnosis display on the side of the projector. Self-diagnosis display will automatically display the
value of the input supply voltage, or details of errors or warnings when they occur. (x page 29)
The following list shows the alphanumeric symbol that is displayed when an error or a warning has occurred and
its details. The input supply voltage is displayed only with the numeric value.
Error/warning display Details Measure
U04 Air lter clogging f Clean the air lter unit.
U11 Intake temperature warning f The operating environment temperature is too
high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature
*1
.
U12 Optical module temperature warning
U13 Exhaust air temperature warning
f The operating environment temperature is too
high, or the air exhaust port may be blocked.
Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature
*1
. Or remove any objects
that are blocking the air exhaust port.
U14 Low temperature warning
f The operating environment temperature is too
low. Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature
*1
.
U16 Light source 1 temperature warning
f The operating environment temperature is too
high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature
*1
.
U17 Light source 2 temperature warning
U21 Intake temperature error
U22 Optical module temperature error
U23 Exhaust air temperature error
f The operating environment temperature is too
high, or the air exhaust port may be blocked.
Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature
*1
. Or remove any objects
that are blocking the air exhaust port.
U24 Low temperature error
f The operating environment temperature is too
low. Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature
*1
.
U25 Light source 1 temperature error f The operating environment temperature is too
high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature
*1
.
U26 Light source 2 temperature error
U76 Air lter unit not installed f Attach the air lter unit.
U81 Low AC voltage warning (below 90 V)
f The input supply voltage is low. Use electric
wiring that can sufciently withstand the power
consumption of the projector.
UA0 Power supply temperature warning
f The operating environment temperature is too
high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature
*1
.
UA1 FPGA temperature warning
UA4 Power supply temperature error
UA5 FPGA temperature error
H01 Battery replacement for the internal clock
f Battery replacement is required. Consult your
dealer.
H11 Intake temperature sensor not present
f If the display does not clear after switching the
main power off and on, consult your dealer.
H12 Optical module temperature sensor not present
H13 Exhaust air temperature sensor not present
H14 Light source 1 temperature sensor not present
H15 Light source 2 temperature sensor not present
H18 Clog sensor not present
F00 Liquid cooling pump 1 warning
f If the display does not clear after switching the
main power off and on, consult your dealer.
F01 Liquid cooling pump 2 warning
F11 Shutter error
F15 Luminance sensor error
Chapter 5Maintenance — Self-diagnosis display
190 - ENGLISH
Error/warning display Details Measure
F50 Radiator fan 1 warning
f If the display does not clear after switching the
main power off and on, consult your dealer.
F51 Radiator fan 2 warning
F52 Radiator fan 3 warning
F53 Radiator fan 4 warning
F54 Radiator fan 5 warning
F55 Radiator fan 6 warning
F56 Exhaust fan 1 warning
F57 Exhaust fan 2 warning
F58 Intake fan 1 warning
F59 Intake fan 2 warning
F61 LD 1 driver communication error
F62 LD 2 driver communication error
F70 Color prism fan 1 warning
F71 Color prism fan 2 warning
F72 Color prism fan 3 warning
F73 Optical engine exhaust fan 1 warning
F74 Optical engine exhaust fan 2 warning
F75 Circuit intake fan warning
F76 LD driver fan warning
F96 Lens mounter error
f If the display does not clear after switching the
main power off and on, consult your dealer.
FA8 Light source 1 error
FC8 Light source 2 error
FE1 Radiator fan 1 error
FE2 Radiator fan 2 error
FE3 Radiator fan 3 error
FE4 Radiator fan 4 error
FE5 Radiator fan 5 error
FE6 Radiator fan 6 error
FE7 Exhaust fan 1 error
FE8 Exhaust fan 2 error
FE9 Intake fan 1 error
FF0 Intake fan 2 error
FF1 Color prism fan 1 error
FF2 Color prism fan 2 error
FF3 Color prism fan 3 error
FF4 Optical engine exhaust fan 1 error
FF5 Optical engine exhaust fan 2 error
FF6 Circuit intake fan error
FF7 LD driver fan error
FH0 Phosphor wheel 1 error SUB
FH1 Phosphor wheel 1 error FPGA
FH2 Phosphor wheel 2 error SUB
FH3 Phosphor wheel 2 error FPGA
FJ0 Liquid cooling pump 1 error
FJ1 Liquid cooling pump 2 error
FL1 Light source 1 unit error
FL2 Light source 2 unit error
*1 Refer to “Operating environment temperature” (x page 212) for the operating environment temperature of the projector.
Note
f The self-diagnosis display and the details of the malfunction may vary.
f For errors and warnings that are not described in the table, consult your dealer.
ENGLISH - 191
Chapter 6 Appendix
This chapter describes specications and after-sales service for the projector.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
192 - ENGLISH
Technical information
PJLink protocol
The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1, and the PJLink protocol can be used to perform
projector setting and projector status query operations from a computer.
Control commands
The following table lists the PJLink protocol commands that can be used to control the projector.
f x characters in tables are non-specic characters.
Command Control details
Parameter/response
string
Remark
POWR Power supply control
0 Standby
1 Power on
POWR?
Power supply status
query
0 Standby
1 Power on
2 Preparing for switching off the projector
3 Warm-up
INPT Input selection
11 RGB1
12 RGB2
INPT? Input selection query
31 DVI-D
32 HDMI
33 DIGITAL LINK
34 SDI1
35 SDI2
AVMT Shutter control 30 Shutter function disabled (shutter: open)
AVMT? Shutter status query 31 Shutter function enabled (shutter: closed)
ERST? Error status query xxxxxx
1st byte
Indicates fan errors, and returns
0 - 2.
f 0 = No error is
detected
f 1 = Warning
f 2 = Error
2nd byte
Indicates light source errors, and
returns 0 - 2.
3rd byte
Indicates temperature errors, and
returns 0 - 2.
4th byte Returns 0.
5th byte
Indicates lter errors, and returns
0 - 2.
6th byte
Indicates other errors, and returns
0 - 2.
LAMP?
Light source status
query
xxxxxxxxxxxx
1st number (1 - 5 digits): Light source 1 runtime
2nd number: 0 = Light source 1 off, 1 = Light source 1 on
3rd number (1 - 5 digits): Light source 2 runtime
4th number: 0 = Light source 2 off, 1 = Light source 2 on
INST? Input selection list query 11 12 31 32 33 34 35
NAME? Projector name query xxxxx
Returns the name set in [PROJECTOR NAME] of [NETWORK
SETUP].
INF1?
Manufacturer name
query
Panasonic Returns manufacturer name.
INF2? Model name query
RZ12K
Returns model name.
RS11K
INF0?
Other information
queries
xxxxx Returns information such as version number.
CLSS? Class information query 1 Returns class for PJLink.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 193
PJLink security authentication
The password used for PJLink is the same as that of the password set for web control.
When using the projector without security authentication, do not set a password for web control.
f For specications related to PJLink, visit the website of Japan Business Machine and Information System
Industries Association.
URL http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
Using Art-Net function
Since the network function of the projector supports the Art-Net function, you can control the projector settings
with the DMX controller and application software using the Art-Net protocol.
Channel denition
The following table lists the channel denitions used for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function.
Channel settings can be switched using the [NETWORK] menu [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] (x page 159).
The control details assigned to each channel are listed in the following table.
f Channel assignment for [USER] is in factory default setting. Assignment can be changed.
Channel
Control details
[2] [USER] [1]
CHANNEL1 LIGHT OUTPUT LIGHT OUTPUT SHUTTER
CHANNEL2 INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT INPUT SELECT
CHANNEL3 LENS POSITION LENS POSITION LENS FUNCTION SELECT
CHANNEL4 LENS H SHIFT LENS H SHIFT LENS CONTROL
CHANNEL5 LENS V SHIFT LENS V SHIFT POWER
CHANNEL6 LENS FOCUS LENS FOCUS LIGHT OUTPUT
CHANNEL7 LENS ZOOM LENS ZOOM ENABLE/DISABLE
CHANNEL8 POWER POWER FADE-IN
CHANNEL9 GEOMETRY GEOMETRY FADE-OUT
CHANNEL10 CUSTOM MASKING CUSTOM MASKING CUSTOM MASKING
CHANNEL11 ENABLE/DISABLE ENABLE/DISABLE GEOMETRY
CHANNEL12 NONE NONE NONE
r Control details
Control details Performance Parameter Default value Remark
LIGHT OUTPUT
100 % 0
0
Can be set in 256 steps between
100 % and 0 %.
0 % 255
INPUT SELECT (when [1] is
selected)
No operation 0-7
0
RGB1 8-15
RGB2 16-23
No operation 24-31
DVI-D 32-39
HDMI 40-47
SDI1 48-55
SDI2 56-63
No operation 64-127
P IN P execution, USER1 128-135
P IN P execution, USER2 136-143
P IN P execution, USER3 144-151
No operation 152-255
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
194 - ENGLISH
Control details Performance Parameter Default value Remark
INPUT SELECT (when [2] or
[USER] is selected)
No operation 0-7
0
RGB1 8-15
RGB2 16-23
DVI-D 24-31
HDMI 32-39
DIGITAL LINK 40-47
SDI1 48-55
SDI2 56-63
No operation 64-119
P IN P OFF 120-127
P IN P execution, USER1 128-135
P IN P execution, USER2 136-143
P IN P execution, USER3 144-151
No operation 152-255
LENS POSITION
No operation 0-31
0
“Move to the home position” is
an operation when [NORMAL] is
selected in [HOME POSITION] of
the [HOME POSITION] screen.
“Move to the ET-D75LE90 lens
standard position” is an operation
when [D75LE90] is selected in
[HOME POSITION] of the [HOME
POSITION] screen.
Move to the home position
32-63
Move to the ET-D75LE90 lens
standard position
Load LENS MEMORY 1 64-79
Load LENS MEMORY 2 80-95
Load LENS MEMORY 3 96-111
Load LENS MEMORY 4 112-127
Load LENS MEMORY 5 128-143
Load LENS MEMORY 6 144-159
Load LENS MEMORY 7 160-175
Load LENS MEMORY 8 176-191
Load LENS MEMORY 9 192-207
Load LENS MEMORY 10 208-223
No operation 224-255
LENS H SHIFT
LENS V SHIFT
LENS FOCUS
LENS ZOOM
Lens adjustment
(
-
) High speed 0-31
128
(
-
) Low speed 32-63
(
-
) Fine
adjustment
64-95
Operation stop 96-159
Lens adjustment
(+) Fine
adjustment
160-191
(+) Low speed 192-223
(+) High speed 224-255
LENS FUNCTION SELECT
(when [1] is selected)
No operation 0-15
0
Operate together with LENS
CONTROL.
“Move to the home position” is
an operation when [NORMAL] is
selected in [HOME POSITION] of
the [HOME POSITION] screen.
“Move to the ET-D75LE90 lens
standard position” is an operation
when [D75LE90] is selected in
[HOME POSITION] of the [HOME
POSITION] screen.
LENS H SHIFT 16-31
LENS V SHIFT 32-47
LENS FOCUS 48-63
LENS ZOOM 64-79
Move to the home position
80-95
Move to the ET-D75LE90 lens
standard position
No operation 96-255
LENS CONTROL (when [1] is
selected)
Lens adjustment
(
-
) High speed 0-31
100
Operate together with LENS
FUNCTION SELECT.
(
-
) Low speed 32-63
(
-
) Fine
adjustment
64-95
Operation stop 96-127
Lens adjustment
(+) Fine
adjustment
128-159
(+) Low speed 160-191
(+) High speed 192-223
Execute command action 224-255
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 195
Control details Performance Parameter Default value Remark
POWER
Standby 0-63
128 No operation 64-191
Power on 192-255
SHUTTER
SHUTTER: Open 0-63
128 No operation 64-191
SHUTTER: Close 192-255
FADE-IN
FADE-OUT
(when [1] is selected)
0.0s 0-15
255
Operate together with
CHANNEL1.
0.5s 16-31
1.0s 32-47
1.5s 48-63
2.0s 64-79
2.5s 80-95
3.0s 96-111
3.5s 112-127
4.0s 128-143
5.0s 144-159
7.0s 160-175
10.0s 176-191
No operation 192-255
GEOMETRY
OFF 0-15
255
KEYSTONE 16-31
CURVED 32-47
PC-1 48-63
PC-2 64-79
PC-3 80-95
CORNER CORRECTION 96-111
No operation 112-255
CUSTOM MASKING
OFF 0-31
255
To use PC-1, PC-2, and PC-3, the
optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.:
ET-UK20) is required.
PC-1 32-63
PC-2 64-95
PC-3 96-127
No operation 128-255
FREEZE
No operation 0-31
128
OFF 32-95
No operation 96-159
ON 160-223
No operation 224-255
COLOR
TINT
No operation 0-31
0
Factory default setting 32-63
-
31 64-65
0 128-129
+31 190-191
No operation 192-255
RASTER PATTERN
No operation 0-15
0
OFF 16-31
WHITE 32-47
YELLOW 48-63
CYAN 64-79
GREEN 80-95
MAGENTA 96-111
RED 112-127
BLUE 128-143
BLACK 144-159
USER LOGO 160-175
No operation 176-255
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
196 - ENGLISH
Control details Performance Parameter Default value Remark
ENABLE/DISABLE
Disable 0-127
0
When “Disable” is set, operations
of all channels become
unacceptable.
Enable 128-255
Note
f If the projector is operated with the remote control or on the control panel, or by the control command while controlling the projector using
the Art-Net function, the setting of the DMX controller or computer application may be different from the projector status. To reect the
controls of all channels to the projector, set “ENABLE/DISABLE” of channel 11 to “Disable” and then set back to “Enable”.
f To create/register the USER LOGO image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.
Control commands via LAN
When web control administrator rights password is set (Protect mode)
Connecting
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a
connection to the projector.
f You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address
Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu [NETWORK STATUS].
Port number
Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu [NETWORK CONTROL] [COMMAND PORT].
2) Check the response from the projector.
Data section Blank Mode Blank Random number section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
“NTCONTROL”
(ASCII string)
‘ ’
0x20
‘1’
0x31
‘ ’
0x20
“zzzzzzzz”
(ASCII code hex number)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 8 bytes 1 byte
f Mode: 1 = Protect mode
f Example: Response during protect mode (random number section is undened value)
“NTCONTROL 1 23181e1e” (CR)
3) Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm.
f “xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz”
xxxxxx Administrator rights user name for the web control (default user name is “admin1”)
yyyyy Password of above administrator rights user (default password is “panasonic”)
zzzzzzzz 8-byte random number obtained in Step 2)
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 197
Command transmission method
Transmit using the following command formats.
r Transmitted data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
Hash value
(Refer to “Connecting” above)
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 32 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
f Example: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command (hash value is calculated from default user
name, password, and acquired random number)
“dbdd2dabd3d4d68c5dd970ec0c29fa6400QPW” (CR)
r Received data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
f Example: The projector is powered on
“00001” (CR)
r Error response
String Details
Termination
symbol
Message
“ERR1” Undened control command
(CR)
0x0d
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
Data length 4 bytes 1 byte
When web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)
Connecting
1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a
connection to the projector.
f You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address
Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu [NETWORK STATUS].
Port number
Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu [NETWORK CONTROL] [COMMAND PORT].
2) Check the response from the projector.
Data section Blank Mode
Termination
symbol
Command
example
“NTCONTROL”
(ASCII string)
‘ ’
0x20
‘0’
0x30
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 9 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
f Mode: 0 = Non-protect mode
f Example: Response during non-protect mode
“NTCONTROL 0” (CR)
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
198 - ENGLISH
Command transmission method
Transmit using the following command formats.
r Transmitted data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
f Example: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command
“00QPW” (CR)
r Received data
Header Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length 1 byte 1 byte Undened length 1 byte
f Example: The power of the projector is in standby status
“00000” (CR)
r Error response
String Details
Termination
symbol
Message
“ERR1” Undened control command
(CR)
0x0d
“ERR2” Out of parameter range
“ERR3” Busy state or no-acceptable period
“ERR4” Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5” Wrong data length
“ERRA” Password mismatch
Data length 4 bytes 1 byte
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 199
<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal
The <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal of the projector conforms with RS-232C so that the projector can be
connected to and controlled from a computer.
Connection
Single projector
Projector connecting terminals
Computer
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cable (straight)
D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)
Multiple projectors
D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)
Connecting terminals on projector 2
D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)
Connecting terminals on projector 1
Computer
D-Sub 9p (male) D-Sub 9p (female)
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cableCommunication cable
When connecting using DIGITAL LINK compatible device
DIGITAL LINK compatible device
Computer
D-Sub 9p (female)
Projector connecting terminals
DIGITAL LINK DIGITAL LINK
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cable (straight)
LAN cable (straight)
Note
f The destination of [RS-232C] (x page 138) must be set according to the connection method.
f When connecting using a DIGITAL LINK compatible device, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [STANDBY MODE] (x page 134) to
[NORMAL] to control the projector during standby.
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the projector cannot be control during standby.
Pin assignments and signal names
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Details
(1) (5)
(6) (9)
(1) NC
(2) TXD Transmitted data
(3) RXD Received data
(4) NC
(5) GND Earth
(6) NC
(7) CTS
Connected internally
(8) RTS
(9) NC
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
200 - ENGLISH
D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Details
(5) (1)
(9) (6)
(1) NC
(2) RXD Received data
(3) TXD Transmitted data
(4) NC
(5) GND Earth
(6) NC
(7) RTS
Connected internally
(8) CTS
(9) NC
Communication conditions (Factory default)
Signal level RS-232C-compliant
Sync. method Asynchronous
Baud rate 9 600 bps
Parity None
Character length 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
X parameter None
S parameter None
Basic format
Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this
order. Add parameters according to the details of control.
(2 bytes)
2 ID characters (2 bytes)
Semi-colon (1 byte)
Colon (1 byte)
3 command characters (3 bytes)
Parameter (undefined length)
Start (1 byte)
ZZ, 01 to 64 and 0A to 0Z
ID designate
End (1 byte)
Basic format (has subcommands)
Parameter (6 bytes)
*1
Symbol “+” or “–” (1 byte) and setting or adjustment value (5
bytes)
Operation (1 byte)
*1
“=” (Set the value specified using parameter)
Sub command (5 bytes)
Same as the basic format
*1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, an operation (E) and parameter are not necessary.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 201
Attention
f If a command is sent after the light source starts lighting, there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed. Try
sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.
f When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before
sending the next command. When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.
Note
f If a command cannot be executed, the “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
f If an invalid parameter is sent, the “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
f ID transmission in RS-232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64, as well as 0A to 0Z groups.
f If a command is sent with an ID designated, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases.
g It matches the projector ID
g ID is designated as ALL and [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to [ON]
g ID is designated as GROUP and [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to [ON]
f STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.
When multiple projectors are controlled
When multiple projectors are all controlled
When controlling multiple projectors together via RS-232C, perform the following settings.
1) Set a different ID for each projector.
2) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector.
3) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
When multiple projectors are all controlled by group unit
When controlling multiple projectors by group unit via RS-232C, perform the following settings.
1) Set a different ID for each projector.
2) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector.
3) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
Note
f There will be no response if two or more projectors have [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] set to [ON].
f There will be no response if two or more projectors of the same group have [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] set to [ON].
f When setting multiple groups, set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector in each group.
Cable specication
1 NC NC 1
2 2
3 3
4 NC NC 4
5 5
6 NC NC 6
7 7
8 8
9 NC NC 9
1 NC NC 1
2 2
3 3
4 NC NC 4
5 5
6 NC NC 6
7 7
8 8
9 NC NC 9
When connected to a computer
Projector
(<SERIAL IN> terminal)
Computer
(DTE specifications)
When multiple projectors are connected
Projector 1
(<SERIAL OUT>
terminal)
Projector 2
(<SERIAL IN>
terminal)
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
202 - ENGLISH
Control command
The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer.
r Projector control command
Command Details
Parameter/response
string
Remark (parameter)
PON Power on
To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command.
POF Power standby
QPW Power query
000
001
STANDBY
Power on
IIS
Switching the input
signal
RG1 RGB1
RG2 RGB2
DVI DVI-D
HD1 HDMI
DL1 DIGITAL LINK
SD1 SDI1
SD2 SDI2
OSH Shutter control 0 OPEN
QSH Shutter status query 1 CLOSE
VSE Aspect ratio switch
0 DEFAULT/VID AUTO
1 4:3
2 16:9
5 THROUGH
QSE
Aspect ratio settings
query
6 HV FIT
9 H FIT
10 V FIT
OPP P IN P execution
0 OFF
1 USER1
QPP P IN P setting query
2 USER2
3 USER3
OCS Sub memory switch
01 - 96 Sub memory number
QSB
Sub memory status
query
r Projector control command (with sub command)
Command Sub command Details Remark
VXX RYCI1 RGB1 input setting +00000 = RGB/YP
B
P
R
, +00001 = Y/C, +00002 = VIDEO
r Lens control command
Command Sub command Details Remark
VXX LNSI2 Lens H shift
+00000 = Fine adjustment 1+, +00001 = Fine adjustment 1
-
, +00100
= Fine adjustment 2+, +00101 = Fine adjustment 2
-
, +00200 = Coarse
adjustment+, +00201 = Coarse adjustment
-
VXX LNSI3 Lens V shift
VXX LNSI4 Lens focus
VXX LNSI5 Lens zoom
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 203
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
It is possible to control the projector remotely (by external contact) from a control panel located away from the
projector where remote control signals cannot reach.
Use the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control panel.
Remote control Contact control
Remote control/contact control
Standby Lit
Light source
RGB1 DIGITAL LINK
RGB2 HDMI
DVI-D
Installation locations in meeting rooms, etc. Remote control board in another location
Pin assignments and signal names
D-Sub 9-pin
Outside view
Pin No. Signal name Open (H) Short (L)
(1) (5)
(6) (9)
(1) GND GND
(2) POWER OFF ON
(3) RGB1 Other RGB1
(4) RGB2 Other RGB2
(5) DIGITAL LINK Other DIGITAL LINK
(6) HDMI Other HDMI
(7) DVI-D Other DVI-D
(8) SHUTTER OFF ON
(9) ENABLE / DISABLE
Controlled by remote
control
Controlled by external
contact
Attention
f When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).
f When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for
RS-232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.
g Power on <b> button, power standby <v> button, <SHUTTER> button
f When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, and then any pins from (3) to (7) and the pin (1) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the
control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for RS-232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also
disabled.
g Power on <b> button, power standby <v> button, <RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <DVI-D> button, <HDMI>
button, <SDI 1/2> button or <SDI> button, <INPUT MENU> button, <SHUTTER> button
Note
f For pin (2) to pin (8) settings, you can make changes if you set [REMOTE2 MODE] to [USER]. (x page 140)
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
204 - ENGLISH
Two-window display combination list
l: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible
a: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible through the same frequency
―: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is not possible
Sub window
RGB1 RGB2
Main window Still image Movie
*1
Y/C Video Still image Movie
*1
RGB1 input
Still image signal
l l
Movie signal
*1
l a
Y/C signal
l a
Video signal
l a
RGB2 input
Still image signal
l l l l
Movie signal
*1
l a a a
DVI-D input
Still image
signal
*2
l l l l l l
Movie signal
*3
l a a a l a
HDMI input
Still image
signal
*2
l l l l l l
Movie signal
*3
l a a a l a
SDI1 input
l a a a l a
SDI2 input
l a a a l a
Dual link SDI
*4
a a
Sub window
DVI-D HDMI
SDI1 SDI2
Dual link
SDI
*4
Main window Still image
*2
Movie
*3
Still image
*2
Movie
*3
RGB1 input
Still image signal
l l l l l l
Movie signal
*1
l a l a a a
Y/C signal
l a l a a a a
Video signal
l a l a a a a
RGB2 input
Still image signal
l l l l l l
Movie signal
*1
l a l a a a
DVI-D input
Still image
signal
*2
l l l
Movie signal
*3
l a a
HDMI input
Still image
signal
*2
l l
l
Movie signal
*3
l a
a
SDI1 input
l a
a
SDI2 input
l a a
Dual link SDI
*4
*1 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, 1080/60p
*2 640 x 480 - 1 920 x 1 200
Non-interlaced signal, dot clock frequency: 25 MHz - 162 MHz
*3 Only supports 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, and 1080/60p
*4 Dual link HD-SDI, dual link 3G-SDI
Note
f In the combination of a, if P IN P function is used with the signals of a different frequency, images in the sub window will not be displayed.
f Images in combination of DIGITAL LINK and other inputs cannot be displayed in P IN P.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 205
Control device password
To initialize your password, consult your distributor.
Upgrade Kit
If the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is applied, the following functions are extended.
Function Standard status When the Upgrade Kit is applied
Adjustment range of
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
Maximum of ±40°
*1
Maximum of ±45°
*1
Adjustment range of
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
Maximum of ±15°
*1
Maximum of ±40°
*1
Adjustment range of
[CURVED]
Vertical arc, Maximum ±50°
*1
Horizontal arc, Maximum ±50°
*1
Vertical arc, Maximum ±100°
*1
Horizontal arc, Maximum ±100°
*1
[CUSTOM MASKING] Cannot be used. The image is masked in optional form.
[PC CORRECTION] of
[UNIFORMITY]
Cannot be used. Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the
entire screen.
*1 The adjustment range of the menu. Refer to “[GEOMETRY] projection range” (x page 37) for the possible projection range.
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
206 - ENGLISH
List of compatible signals
The following table species the video signals compatible with the projector.
f Symbols that indicate formats are as follows.
g V: VIDEO, Y/C
g R: RGB
g Y: YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
g D: DVI-D
g H: HDMI
g S: SDI
Compatible signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
Format
Plug and play
*1
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
RGB2
DVI-D
HDMI
EDID1 EDID2 EDID3
NTSC/NTSC4.43/
PAL-M/PAL60
720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 V
PAL/PAL-N/SECAM 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 V
525i (480i) 720 x 480i 15.7 59.9 13.5 R/Y/S
*2
625i (576i) 720 x 576i 15.6 50.0 13.5 R/Y/S
*2
525i (480i) 720 (1440) x 480i
*3
15.7 59.9 27.0 D/H
625i (576i) 720 (1440) x 576i
*3
15.6 50.0 27.0 D/H
525p (480p) 720 x 483 31.5 59.9 27.0 R/Y/D/H
l
l l
625p (576p) 720 x 576 31.3 50.0 27.0 R/Y/D/H
l
l l
750 (720)/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
*2
l
l l
750 (720)/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
*2
l
l l
1125 (1080)/60i
*4
1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 48.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
1125 (1080)/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l
1125 (1080)/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3 R/Y/D/H/S
1125 (1080)/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
1125 (1080)/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 R/Y/D/H/S
l
l l
2K/24p 2 048 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3 S
*5
2K/24sF 2 048 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3 S
*5
2K/48p 2 048 x 1 080 54.0 48.0 148.5 S
*6
2K/50p 2 048 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5 S
*6
2K/60p 2 048 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5 S
*6
640 x 400
640 x 400 31.5 70.1 25.2 R/D/H
640 x 400 37.9 85.1 31.5 R/D/H
640 x 480
640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2 R/D/H
l l l l l
640 x 480 35.0 66.7 30.2 R/D/H
640 x 480 37.9 72.8 31.5 R/D/H
l
l l l
640 x 480 37.5 75.0 31.5 R/D/H
l
l l l
640 x 480 43.3 85.0 36.0 R/D/H
800 x 600
800 x 600 35.2 56.3 36.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
800 x 600 48.1 72.2 50.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
800 x 600 46.9 75.0 49.5 R/D/H
l
l l l
800 x 600
53.7 85.1 56.3 R/D/H
832
x 624 832 x 624 49.7 74.6 57.3 R/D/H
l
l l l
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 207
Compatible signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
Format
Plug and play
*1
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
RGB2
DVI-D
HDMI
EDID1 EDID2 EDID3
1024 x 768
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9 R/D/H
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 024 x 768 56.5 70.1 75.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 024 x 768 60.0 75.0 78.8 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 024 x 768 65.5 81.6 86.0 R/D/H
1 024 x 768 68.7 85.0 94.5 R/D/H
1 024 x 768
*7
81.4 100.0 113.3 R/D/H
1 024 x 768
*7
98.8 120.0 139.1 R/D/H
l
l l l
1152 x 864
1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6 R/D/H
1 152 x 864 64.0 70.0 94.2 R/D/H
1 152 x 864 67.5 74.9 108.0 R/D/H
1 152 x 864 77.1 85.0 119.7 R/D/H
1152 x 870 1 152 x 870 68.7 75.1 100.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 720
*7
76.3 100.0 131.8 R/D/H
1 280 x 720
*7
92.6 120.0 161.6 R/D/H
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3 R/D/H
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 768
*8
47.4 60.0 68.3 R/D/H
1 280 x 768 60.3 74.9 102.3 R/D/H
1 280 x 768 68.6 84.8 117.5 R/D/H
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 800
*8
49.3 59.9 71.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 800 62.8 74.9 106.5 R/D/H
1 280 x 800 71.6 84.9 122.5 R/D/H
1280 x 960 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0 R/D/H
1280 x 1024
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 1 024 72.3 66.3 125.0 R/D/H
1 280 x 1 024 78.2 72.0 135.1 R/D/H
1 280 x 1 024 80.0 75.0 135.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 280 x 1 024 91.1 85.0 157.5 R/D/H
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0 R/D/H
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5 R/D/H
1400 x 1050
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9 R/D/H
1
400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0 R/D/H
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6 R/D/H
l
l l l
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8 R/D/H
1 400 x 1 050 78.8 72.0 149.3 R/D/H
1 400 x 1 050 82.2 75.0 155.9 R/D/H
1440 x 900
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8 R/D/H
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5 R/D/H
1600 x 900
1 600 x 900 46.4 49.9 96.5 R/D/H
1 600 x 900 55.9 60.0 119.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1600 x 1200
1 600 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 131.5 R/D/H
1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0 R/D/H
l
l l l
1680 x 1050
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3 R/D/H
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5 R/D/H
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5 R/D/H
1 920 x 1 080
*8
66.6 59.9 138.5 R/D/H
1 920 x 1 080
*9
67.2 60.0 173.0 R
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
208 - ENGLISH
Compatible signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
Format
Plug and play
*1
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
RGB2
DVI-D
HDMI
EDID1 EDID2 EDID3
1920 x 1200
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3 R/D/H
1 920 x 1 200
*8
74.0 60.0 154.0 R/D/H
l
l l
*10
l
*10
1 920 x 1 200
*9
74.6 59.9 193.3 R
*1 Signals with a l in the Plug and play columns are signals described in EDID (extended display identication data) of the projector. If a signal has no
l in the Plug and play columns but has an entry in the Format column, it can be input. For signals without a l in the Plug and play columns, there
are instances when resolution cannot be selected on the computer even though the projector supports them.
*2 Only for single link connection
*3 Pixel-Repetition signal (dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz) only
*4 When a 1125 (1035)/60i signal was input, it is displayed as a 1125 (1080)/60i signal.
*5 Dual link HD-SDI is supported.
*6 Dual link 3G-SDI is supported.
*7 Image is displayed as 3D image in the frame sequential format when [3D INPUT FORMAT] is set to [AUTO]. To display images in 2D, set [3D
INPUT FORMAT] to [NATIVE].
*8 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
*9 Samples the pixels in the image processing circuit and projects the image.
*10 Only for PT-RZ12K
Note
f A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots. The number of display dots is as follows.
g PT-RZ12K: 1 920 x 1 200
g PT-RS11K: 1 400 x 1 050
f The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.
f When interlaced signals are connected, ickering may occur on the projected image.
f DIGITAL LINK input compatible signal is the same as HDMI input compatible signal.
List of simultaneous input 2D compatible signals
The following table species the simultaneous input (2D) compatible video signals that the projector can project.
2D compatible signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock freq.
(MHz)
HDMI/DVI SDI1/SDI2
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5
l l
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5
l l
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0
l
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5
l
1400 x 1050
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9
l
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8
l
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5
l
1 920 x 1 080 66.6 59.9 138.5
l
1920 x 1200
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3
l
1 920 x 1 200 74.0 60.0 154.0
l
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 209
List of 3D compatible signals
The following table species the 3D compatible video signals that the projector can project.
f Abbreviations for input formats and 3D formats in the table have the following meanings.
g FP: Frame packing format
g SBS: Side by side format
g TB: Top and bottom format
g LBL: Line by line format
g FS: Frame sequential format
g 3G: 3G-SDI Level B simultaneous format
g H-D: HDMI & DVI-D input simultaneous format
g R1-2: RGB1 & RGB2 input simultaneous format
g S1-2: SDI1 & SDI2 input simultaneous format
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
HDMI DVI-D
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
FP
SBS
*1
TB FS
SBS
*1
TB LBL FS
720/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3
l l l
l l l
720/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3
l l l
l l l
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3
l l
l l
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3
l l
l l
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
l l l
l l
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 24.0 74.3
l l
1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3
l l
1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3
l l
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5
l l
l l
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5
l l
l l
640 x 480 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2
l
800 x 600 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0
l
1024 x 768
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9
l
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0
l
1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3
l
l
1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1
l
l
1152 x 864 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6
l
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5
l
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5
l
1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8
l
l
1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6
l
l
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3
l
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5
l
1 280 x 768
*2
47.4 60.0 68.3
l
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0
l
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5
l
1 280 x 800
*2
49.3 59.9 71.0
l
1280 x 960 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0
l
1280 x 1024
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0
l
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0
l
1366
x 768
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5
l
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0
l
1400 x 1050
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9
l
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0
l
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6
l
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8
l
1440 x 900
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5
l
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8
l
1600 x 900
1 600 x 900 46.4 49.9 96.5
l
1 600 x 900 55.9 60.0 119.0
l
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
210 - ENGLISH
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
HDMI DVI-D
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
FP
SBS
*1
TB FS
SBS
*1
TB LBL FS
1600 x 1200
1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0
l
1 600 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 131.5
l
1680 x 1050
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3
l
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5
l
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5
l
1 920 x 1 080
*2
66.6 59.9 138.5
l
1920 x 1200
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3
l
1 920 x 1 200
*2
74.0 60.0 154.0
l
l
*1 Supports half.
*2 VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking) compliant
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
RGB1/RGB2 SDI1/SDI2
H-D
R1-2
S1-2
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
SBS
*1
TB
LBL
FS
SBS
*1
TB
LBL
3G
720/60p 1 280 x 720 45.0 60.0 74.3
l l l
l l l l l l l
720/50p 1 280 x 720 37.5 50.0 74.3
l l l
l l l l l l l
1080/60i 1 920 x 1 080i 33.8 60.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l l
1080/50i 1 920 x 1 080i 28.1 50.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l l
1080/24p 1 920 x 1 080 27.0 24.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l l
1080/24sF 1 920 x 1 080i 27.0 24.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l l
1080/25p 1 920 x 1 080 28.1 25.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l l
1080/30p 1 920 x 1 080 33.8 30.0 74.3
l l
l l
l l l l
1080/60p 1 920 x 1 080 67.5 60.0 148.5
l l
l l
l l l
1080/50p 1 920 x 1 080 56.3 50.0 148.5
l l
l l
l l l
640 x 480 640 x 480 31.5 59.9 25.2
l
800 x 600 800 x 600 37.9 60.3 40.0
l
1024 x 768
1 024 x 768 39.6 50.0 51.9
l
1 024 x 768 48.4 60.0 65.0
l
1 024 x 768 81.4 100.0 113.3
l
1 024 x 768 98.8 120.0 139.1
l
1152 x 864 1 152 x 864 53.7 60.0 81.6
l
1280 x 720
1 280 x 720 37.1 49.8 60.5
l
1 280 x 720 44.8 59.9 74.5
l
1 280 x 720 76.3 100.0 131.8
l
1 280 x 720 92.6 120.0 161.6
l
1280 x 768
1 280 x 768 39.6 49.9 65.3
l
1 280 x 768 47.8 59.9 79.5
l
1 280 x 768
*2
47.4 60.0 68.3
l
1280 x 800
1 280 x 800 41.3 50.0 68.0
l
1 280 x 800 49.7 59.8 83.5
l
1 280 x 800
*2
49.3 59.9 71.0
l
1280 x 960 1 280 x 960 60.0 60.0 108.0
l
1280 x 1024
1 280 x 1 024 52.4 50.0 88.0
l
1 280 x 1 024 64.0 60.0 108.0
l
1366 x 768
1 366 x 768 47.7 59.8 85.5
l
1 366 x 768 39.6 49.9 69.0
l
1400 x 1050
1 400 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 99.9
l
l l
1 400 x 1 050 64.0 60.0 108.0
l
l l
1 400 x 1 050 65.2 60.0 122.6
l
l l
1 400 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 121.8
l
l l
1440 x 900
1 440 x 900 55.9 59.9 106.5
l
1 440 x 900 46.3 49.9 86.8
l
1600 x 900
1 600 x 900 46.4 49.9 96.5
l
1 600 x 900 55.9 60.0 119.0
l
Chapter 6Appendix — Technical information
ENGLISH - 211
3D compatible
signal
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
RGB1/RGB2 SDI1/SDI2
H-D
R1-2
S1-2
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
SBS
*1
TB
LBL
FS
SBS
*1
TB
LBL
3G
1600 x 1200
1 600 x 1 200 75.0 60.0 162.0
l
1 600 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 131.5
l
1680 x 1050
1 680 x 1 050 65.3 60.0 146.3
l
1 680 x 1 050 54.1 50.0 119.5
l
1920 x 1080
1 920 x 1 080 55.6 49.9 141.5
l
1 920 x 1 080
*2
66.6 59.9 138.5
l
1920 x 1200
1 920 x 1 200 61.8 49.9 158.3
l
l l
1 920 x 1 200
*2
74.0 60.0 154.0
l
l
l l
*1 Supports half.
*2 VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking) compliant
Note
f DIGITAL LINK input compatible signal is the same as HDMI input compatible signal.
Chapter 6Appendix — Specications
212 - ENGLISH
Specications
The specications of the projector are as follows.
Power supply
100 V - 240 V ~ (100 V - 240 V alternating current), 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption
1 200 W (12.0 A - 6.0 A)
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO]: 0.3 W
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL]: 4 W
DLP chip
Size
PT-RZ12K 24.4 mm (0.96") (aspect ratio 16:10)
PT-RS11K 24.1 mm (0.95") (aspect ratio 4:3)
Display system DLP chip x 3, DLP projection system
Number of pixels
PT-RZ12K 2 304 000 pixels (1 920 x 1 200 dots)
PT-RS11K 1 470 000 pixels (1 400 x 1 050 dots)
Lens Optional
Light source Laser, 2-bank type
Light output
*1
12 000 lm (ANSI)
Contrast ratio
*1
20 000:1 (when [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3])
Color system 7 standards (NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM/PAL60)
Projected image size 1.78 m (70") to 25.40 m (1 000")
*2
Image aspect ratio
PT-RZ12K 16:10
PT-RS11K 4:3
Projection method [FRONT/CEILING], [FRONT/FLOOR], [REAR/CEILING], [REAR/FLOOR]
Power cord length 3.0 m (118-1/8")
Outer case Molded plastic
Dimensions
Width 578 mm (22-3/4")
Height 270 mm (10-5/8") (excluding the feet)
Depth 725 mm (28-17/32") (excluding the protrusion)
Weight
Approx. 44.0 k] (96.9 lbs.)
*3
Noise level
*1
43 dB
Operating
environment
Operating
environment
temperature
0 °C (32 °F) to 50 °C (122 °F)
*4
Operating
environment
humidity
10 % to 80 % (no condensation)
Remote
control
Power supply DC 3 V (AA/R6/LR6 battery x 2)
Operating range Within approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)
Weight
150 ] (5.3 ozs.) (including batteries)
Dimensions Width: 47.5 mm (1-7/8"), Height: 181.5 mm (7-5/32"), Depth: 27.5 mm (1-3/32")
*1 Measurement, measuring conditions and method of notation all comply with ISO21118 international standards.
*2 When the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE8) is used, the projected image size for the maximum projection distance will be 1.78 m (70") to
15.24 m (600"). When the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE90) is used, the projected image size for the maximum projection distance will be
3.05 m (120") to 15.24 m (600").
*3 Average value. Weight varies for each product.
*4 The operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 45 °C (113 °F) if the projector is used at an altitude between 1 400 m
(4 593') and 4 200 m (13 780') above sea level. However, when [OPERATING MODE] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION
SETTING] is set to [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or [LONG LIFE3], the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F)
and 45 °C (113 °F), and when the Smoke Cut Filter is used, it should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F).
When [OPERATING MODE] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu [OPERATION SETTING] is set to [ECO], [LONG LIFE1], [LONG LIFE2], or
[LONG LIFE3], the projector cannot be used at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level. When the Smoke Cut Filter is used, the
projector cannot be used at an altitude of 1 400 m (4 593') or higher above sea level.
Chapter 6Appendix — Specications
ENGLISH - 213
r Applicable scanning frequency
Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 206) for the types of video signals that can be used with the
projector.
For video signal, Y/C signal Horizontal: 15.75 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz; Horizontal: 15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
For RGB signal
Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz, Vertical: 24 Hz to 120 Hz
PIAS (Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning) system
f Dot clock frequency: 162 MHz or less
For YC
B
C
R
/YP
B
P
R
signal
f 525i (480i)
Horizontal: 15.73 kHz, Vertical: 59.94 Hz
f 525p (480p)
Horizontal: 31.47 kHz, Vertical: 59.94 Hz
f 750 (720)/60p
Horizontal: 45 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f 1125 (1035)/60i
Horizontal: 33.75 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/50i
Horizontal: 28.13 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/24sF
Horizontal: 27 kHz, Vertical: 48 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/30p
Horizontal: 33.75 kHz, Vertical: 30 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/50p
Horizontal: 56.25 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 625i (576i)
Horizontal: 15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 625p (576p)
Horizontal: 31.25 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 750 (720)/50p
Horizontal: 37.5 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/60i
Horizontal: 33.75 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/24p
Horizontal: 27 kHz, Vertical: 24 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/25p
Horizontal: 28.13 kHz, Vertical: 25 Hz
f 1125 (1080)/60p
Horizontal: 67.5 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz
f The SYNC/HD and VD terminals do not support 3 value SYNC.
For DVI-D signal
525i (480i)
*1
, 625i (576i)
*1
, 525p (480p), 625p (576p), 750 (720)/60p,
750 (720)/50p, 1125 (1080)/60i, 1125 (1080)/50i, 1125 (1080)/24p,
1125 (1080)/24sF, 1125 (1080)/25p, 1125 (1080)/30p,
1125 (1080)/60p, 1125 (1080)/50p
f Displayable resolution: 640 x 480 to 1 920 x 1 200 (non-interlaced)
f Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
For HDMI signal
525i (480i)
*1
, 625i (576i)
*1
, 525p (480p), 625p (576p), 750 (720)/60p,
750 (720)/50p, 1125 (1080)/60i, 1125 (1080)/50i, 1125 (1080)/24p,
1125 (1080)/24sF, 1125 (1080)/25p, 1125 (1080)/30p,
1125 (1080)/60p, 1125 (1080)/50p
f Displayable resolution: 640 x 480 to 1 920 x 1 200 (non-interlaced)
f Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz
For SDI signal
SD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 259 compliant
YC
B
C
R
4:2:2 10-bit
480i, 576i
Single link HD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 292 compliant
YP
B
P
R
4:2:2 10-bit
720/50p, 720/60p, 1035/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p,
1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p
Dual link HD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 372 compliant
RGB 4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit
1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p,
2048 x 1080/24p, 2048 x 1080/24sF
X'Y'Z' 4:4:4 12-bit
2048 x 1080/24p, 2048 x 1080/24sF
3G-SDI signal SMPTE ST 424 compliant
YP
B
P
R
4:2:2 10-bit
1080/50p, 1080/60p
RGB 4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit
1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p
Dual link 3G-SDI signal SMPTE ST 425 compliant
YP
B
P
R
4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit
1080/60p, 1080/50p, 2048 x 1080/60p, 2048 x 1080/50p,
2048 x 1080/48p
RGB 4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit
1080/60p, 1080/50p, 2048 x 1080/60p, 2048 x 1080/50p,
2048 x 1080/48p
*1 Pixel-Repetition signal (dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz) only
Note
f DIGITAL LINK input compatible signal is the same as HDMI input compatible signal.
Chapter 6Appendix — Specications
214 - ENGLISH
r Terminal
<RGB 1 IN> terminal
1 set (BNC x 5 (RGB/YP
B
P
R
/YC
B
C
R
/YC/VIDEO x 1))
RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
VD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
YP
B
P
R
signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, P
B
P
R
: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
Y/C signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p], C: 0.286 V [p-p] 75 Ω
VIDEO signal 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<RGB 2 IN> terminal
1 set, high-density D-Sub 15 p (female)
RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)
SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
VD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative
polarity compatible
YP
B
P
R
signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, P
B
P
R
: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
<DVI-D IN> terminal 1 set, DVI-D 24 p, single link, DVI 1.0 compliant, HDCP compatible
<HDMI IN> terminal 1 set, HDMI 19 p, HDCP compatible, Deep Color compatible
<SDI IN 1> terminal
1 set (BNC)
SD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 259 compliant
HD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 292 compliant
3G-SDI signal SMPTE ST 424 compliant
Dual link HD-SDI
(LINK-A) signal
SMPTE ST 372 compliant
Dual link 3G-SDI (Link
1) signal
SMPTE ST 425 compliant
<SDI IN 2> terminal
1 set (BNC)
SD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 259 compliant
HD-SDI signal SMPTE ST 292 compliant
3G-SDI signal SMPTE ST 424 compliant
Dual link HD-SDI
(LINK-B) signal
SMPTE ST 372 compliant
Dual link 3G-SDI (Link
2) signal
SMPTE ST 425 compliant
<3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal
1 set (BNC)
During input setting TTL high impedance
During output setting TTL output: Maximum 10 mA
<3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal
1 set (BNC)
TTL output: Maximum 10 mA
<SERIAL IN>/ <SERIAL OUT>
terminal
D-Sub 9 p, 1 set each, RS-232C compliant, for computer control
<REMOTE 1 IN>/ <REMOTE 1
OUT> terminal
M3 stereo mini jack, 1 set each, for remote control (wired)/for projector connection control
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal 1 set, D-Sub 9 p, for contact control
<DIGITAL LINK/LAN> terminal
1 set, RJ-45, for network and DIGITAL LINK connections (HDBaseT
TM
compliant), PJLink compatible,
100Base-TX, Art-Net compatible, HDCP compatible, Deep Color compatible
Note
f The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
Chapter 6Appendix — Dimensions
ENGLISH - 215
Dimensions
Unit: mm
242 (9-17/32")
289 (11-3/8")
578 (22-3/4")
637 (25-3/32")
484 (19-1/16")
53.5 (2-3/32")
142 (5-19/32")
270 (10-5/8")
15 (19/32")
725 (28-17/32")
* Actual dimensions may differ depending on the product.
Chapter 6Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
216 - ENGLISH
Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
f When installing the projector to a ceiling, be sure to use the specied optional Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model
No.: ET-PKD520H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD520S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PKD520B (Projector Mount
Bracket)). The Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD520H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD520S (for Low
Ceilings)) is used in combination with the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET-PKD520B (Projector Mount
Bracket)).
f Attach the drop-prevention set that comes with the Ceiling Mount Bracket. If you need the drop-prevention set
(hex bolt with washer (M10 x 40), wire rope: TTRA0143) separately, consult your dealer.
f Ask a qualied technician to do the installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling.
f Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of the Ceiling Mount
Bracket not manufactured by Panasonic or the inappropriate choice of location for installing the Ceiling Mount
Bracket, even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired.
f Unused products must be removed promptly by a qualied technician.
f Referring to the following screw holes for ceiling mount diagram, use screws of sufcient length to reach the
embedded nuts.
f Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten bolts to their specied tightening torques. Do not use
electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
f Read the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket for details.
f The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
Bottom view
Model No. of Ceiling Mount Bracket: ET-PKD520H (for High Ceilings)
ET-PKD520S (for Low Ceilings)
ET-PKD520B (Projector Mount Bracket)
Torque: (M6) 4 ± 0.5 N·m
Screw holes for ceiling mount
Thread engagement depth
Max. screw hole depth
Embedded nut
Embedded nut (Thread engagement depth)
Unit: mm
27 (1-1/16")
10 (13/32")
27 (1-1/16")
M6
M6
Index
ENGLISH - 217
0 – 9
[3D COLOR MATCHING] 103
[3D FRAME DELAY]
105
[3D INPUT FORMAT]
103
[3D PICTURE BALANCE]
104
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]
106
[3D SETTINGS]
79, 102
[3D SYNC SETTING]
102
[3D SYSTEM SETTING]
102
[3D TEST MODE]
105
[3D TEST PATTERN]
105
A
Accessories 24
<AC IN> terminal
28, 54
[AC VOLTAGE MONITOR]
143
Adjusting adjustable feet
45
[ADVANCED MENU]
78, 95
Air lter unit
184
Air lter unit compartment
184
Art-Net
22, 193
[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]
159
[Art-Net STATUS]
160
[ASPECT]
90
<ASPECT> button
Remote control
26, 72
Aspect function
72
Attaching/removing the projection lens
46
Automatic setup function
72
[AUTO SETUP]
109
<AUTO SETUP> button
Projector body
29, 72
Remote control
26, 72
[AUTO SIGNAL]
109
B
[BACK COLOR] 120
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
110
[BLANKING]
95
[BRIGHTNESS]
83
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]
130
C
Cautions on use 22
Cautions when installing
18
Cautions when transporting
18
Ceiling Mount Bracket
216
[CLAMP POSITION]
96
[CLOCK PHASE]
92
[COLOR]
83
[COLOR MATCHING]
107
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
83
Connecting the power cord
54
Connecting the remote control to the projector
with a cable
32
Connection
48
[CONTRAST]
82
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
154
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
153
[Crestron Connected(TM)]
178
[CUT OFF]
124
D
[DARK TIME SETTING] 104
[DATE AND TIME]
135
<DEFAULT> button
Remote control
26, 77
Deleting the registered signal
149
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
95
DIGITAL LINK
21
<DIGITAL LINK> button
Projector body
29, 70
Remote control
26, 70
[DIGITAL LINK IN]
115
[DIGITAL LINK MENU]
159
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]
156
[DIGITAL LINK SETUP]
156
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]
157
Dimensions
215
Display language
79, 101
[DISPLAY OPTION]
79, 107
[DISPLAY SETTING]
152
Disposal
22
<DVI-D> button
Projector body
29, 70
Remote control
26, 70
[DVI-D IN]
113
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
87
E
Early Warning Software 22
[EDGE BLENDING]
97
<ENTER> button
Projector body
29
Remote control
26
Expanding signal lock-in range
150
F
Filter indicator 182
<FOCUS> button
Remote control
26, 64
[FRAME CREATION]
99
[FRAME LOCK]
99
[FRAME RESPONSE]
98
[FREEZE]
123
Function button
73
<FUNCTION> button
Remote control
26, 73
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
140
G
[GAMMA] 85
[GEOMETRY]
92
H
<HDMI> button
Projector body
29, 70
Remote control
26, 70
[HDMI IN]
114
I
<ID ALL> button
Remote control
26, 74
<ID SET> button
Remote control
26, 74
[IMAGE ROTATION]
120
[INITIALIZE]
144
Initial setting
56
[INITIAL STARTUP]
135
<INPUT MENU> button
Remote control
26, 70
[INPUT RESOLUTION]
96
Input selection terminal indicator
29
Installation mode
34
L
[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION] 108
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]
103
<LENS> button
Projector body
29, 64
[LENS CALIBRATION]
140
[LENS MEMORY]
141
<LIGHT> button
Remote control
26
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
129
Light source indicator
182
List of compatible signals
206
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
144
<LOCK> button
Remote control
26
M
Main menu 77
Main power switch
28, 55
Maintenance
184
<MENU> button
Projector body
29, 76
Remote control
26, 76
Menu item
78
N
Navigating through the menu 76
[NETWORK]
81, 156
Network connection
160
[NETWORK CONTROL]
158
[NETWORK SETUP]
157
[NETWORK STATUS]
158
[NOISE REDUCTION]
87
[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]
134
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
134
O
<ON SCREEN> button
Remote control
26, 72
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
118
On-screen menu
76
[OPERATION SETTING]
125
Optional accessories
25
P
[PICTURE] 78, 82
[PICTURE MODE]
82
[P IN P]
80, 146
P IN P function
146
[POSITION]
78, 90
Power cord
54
Power indicator
54
Power on button
Projector body
29
Remote control
26
Power standby button
Projector body
29
Remote control
26
Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount
Bracket
216
Precautions for use
18
Projecting
64
[PROJECTION METHOD]
125
Projector body
28
[PROJECTOR ID]
125
[PROJECTOR SETUP]
80, 125
Protecting the registered signal
150
R
[RASTER POSITION] 100
Read this rst!
5
Registering new signals
149
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal
32
<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal
32
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
203
[REMOTE2 MODE]
140
Remote control
26
Remote control operations
70
Renaming the registered signal
149
Replacing the air lter unit
186
Replacing the unit
186
Resetting to the factory default
77
<RGB1> button
Projector body
29, 70
Remote control
26, 70
<RGB2> button
Projector body
29, 70
Remote control
26, 70
[RGB IN]
112
[RS-232C]
138, 199
S
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE] 106
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
144
[SCHEDULE]
136
[SCREEN SETTING]
108
<SDI 1/2> button
Projector body
29, 70
<SDI> button
Remote control
26, 70
[SDI IN]
117
Security
21
[SECURITY]
80, 152
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
152
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
152
Selecting the input signal
64
Self-diagnosis display
29, 189
<SERIAL IN> terminal
199
<SERIAL OUT> terminal
199
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
145
Setting ID number of the remote control
74
Setting up
34
[SHARPNESS]
86
[SHIFT]
90
<SHIFT> button
Remote control
26, 64
<SHUTTER> button
Projector body
29, 71
Remote control
26, 71
[SHUTTER SETTING]
121
[SIGNAL LIST]
80, 149
[SIMUL INPUT SETTING]
111
Specications
212
sRGB-compliant video
89
[STANDBY MODE]
134
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
135
[STARTUP LOGO]
120
[STATUS]
142
<STATUS> button
Remote control
26, 73
Sub memory
151
<S-VIDEO Y/C> button
Remote control
26, 70
Index
Index
218 - ENGLISH
Switching off the projector 63
Switching on the projector
55
Switch the input signal
70
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
86
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
88
T
Temperature indicator 182
[TEST PATTERN]
80, 148
<TEST PATTERN> button
Remote control
26, 73
[TEXT CHANGE]
153
[TINT]
83
Troubleshooting
187
Two-window
204
U
[UNIFORMITY] 121
Upgrade Kit
205
V
<VIDEO> button
Remote control
26, 70
W
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] 123
Z
[ZOOM] 91
<ZOOM> button
Remote control
26, 64
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used
electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household
waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please
take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the
Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources
and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could
otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact
your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the
items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier
for further information.
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Product Information (for Turkey only)
AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
Eski Ekipman ve Bataryaların İşlenmesi.
Sadece geri dönüşüm sistemleri olan Avrupa Birliği ve ülkeleri için geçerlidir.
Ürünler, ambalaj ve/veya ekli belgeler üzerindeki bu semboller kullanılmış elektrik ve elektronik
ürünlerin ve pillerin genel ev atığı ile karıştırılmaması gerektiğini ifade eder.
Eski ürünlerin ve pillerin toplanması ve geri kazanılması için bu atıkları lütfen yasayla belirlenmiş
olan uygun toplama merkezlerine teslim ediniz.
Bu atıkların doğru işlenmesiyle, değerli kaynakların korunmasına ve insan sağlığı ve çevreye
olası negatif etkilerinin engellenmesine yardımcı olabilirsiniz.
Atıkların toplanması ve geri dönüşümü için detaylı bilgi için lütfen bağlı olduğunuz yerel
yönetimlerle iletişime geçiniz.
Atıkların atılmasıyla ilgili yanlış uygulamalar yasayla belirlenmiş olan cezalara sebebiyet verebilir.
W0915NN0 -YI
Panasonic System Communications Company of North America
5th Floor, Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
TEL: (877) 803 - 8492
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3
TEL: (905) 624 - 5010
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site : http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/
© Panasonic Corporation 2015
215


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Panasonic PT-RS11K at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Panasonic PT-RS11K in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 26,64 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Panasonic PT-RS11K

Panasonic PT-RS11K User Manual - German - 223 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info